وَاِنۡ
Appears 142 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "وَاِنۡ".
وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ فِیۡ رَیۡبٍ مِّمَّا نَزَّلۡنَا عَلٰی عَبۡدِنَا فَاۡتُوۡا بِسُوۡرَۃٍ مِّنۡ مِّثۡلِہٖ وَادۡعُوۡا شُہَدَآءَکُمۡ مِّنۡ دُوۡنِ اللّٰہِ اِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ صٰدِقِیۡنَ
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
«古兰经» 无可比拟的优美绝伦的主题, 在五个不同的地方被述及, 即: 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89与52:34, 35中。五处中有两处 (2:24与10:39) 的挑战是相同的, 而在其余三处, 曾向不信道的人提出了三个不同的要求。初看, 三个不同地方的挑战的不同形式似乎不协调。其实并非如此。实际上, 这些经文内一定的要求是时常存在的, 挑战在穆圣时代, 甚至到现在, 在 «古兰经» 所述及的所有不同形式中都是开放的。
在解释这些不同形式挑战以前, 值得注意的是: «古兰经» 提到这些要求时, 始终不忘财产与权力。如前所述, 除了在本节经文中, 没有新的挑战, 而只是重复10:39 中的那个挑战, 由此得到一个肯定的结论:在财产与权力问题和创作像 «古兰经» 或其一部分的挑战之间存在着一种紧密的连系。这一连系在于这样一个事实:即 «古兰经» 是以一种无价之宝向不信道的人提出的。当不信道的人向穆圣要求各种物质财宝时 (11:13), 他告诉他们, 他的 «古兰经» 是他的无与伦比的财宝; 当他们问: “为什么没有一个天使同他一起来?” (11:13) 他回答他们说, 天使确已降临于他, 因为天使们的使命是带来主的启示, 而主的启示已赐给了他。因此, 这两种要求—对于财宝与天使降临的要求—已由天使带来的无与伦比的财宝 «古兰经» 全被满足了, 创作此类天经的挑战是为证明它的无可匹敌的素质而提出的。
现在可以把含有这项挑战的不同经文分开来看。17:89 中提出的最大一个要求, 要求不信道的人拿一本具有像 «古兰经» 全文那样包含多种多样素质的书来。那节经文中并不要求不信道的人把他们的文章做为主的言语陈述。他们可以拿出他们自己的文章并宣称它可与 «古兰经» 相提并论, 或甚至超过 古兰经»。但是, 由于当时提出那个挑战时, 全部 «古兰经» 尚未降下, 并不要求不信道的人当时当地写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经文; 这种挑战因此暗示他们永远也写不出像 «古兰经» 那样的文章, 既写不出当时那种形式的
«古兰经», 也将写不出像将要降示完整的 «古兰经»。而且, 此一挑战并不只局限於穆圣时代的不信道的人, 也可延续到所有时代抱有疑问的人以及评论家。在11:14 节经文中, 不信道的人们被约照写十章而不是写全部 «古兰经», 理由是, 那节经文中的问题并不全面涉及整部 «古兰经» 的完美而是仅涉及其部分的完美。不信道的人反对其中某些部分, 说它们有缺陷。因此, 未曾要求他们写出像全部 «古兰经» 那样一本完整的经典, 而只是用十章来替代他们认为有缺陷的那些 «古兰经» 部分, 这样就可检验它们主张的真实性。说到选择十章这个特定数目, 可以这么说, 因为在17:89 中, 全部 «古兰经» 被声称为一部完美无缺的经典, 反对 «古兰经» 的人就被约照写 «古兰经» 那样的全部经典; 但是在11:14 节经文中的问题是, 某些部分受到反对, 因此请他们挑选他们认为最有缺陷的十个部分, 然后写出类似那些部分的文章。在10:39 节中, 只要求不信教的人写出类似 «古兰经» 中的一章。这是因为, 不像上述的两节经文, 那节经文的挑战是支持 «古兰经» 本身所作出的一个宣称, 而不是驳斥不信教者的反对意见的。在10:38节经文中, «古兰经» 声称有五种非常显著的特点。为了支持这一声称, 10:39 节经文对那些否认或怀疑它的人们提出一个挑战, 要他们以同样完美的形式写出一个单章, 其中要含有像第十章所含有的这些素质。第五次挑战写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经典, 是在这节注释 (2:24) 经文中, 这节像10:39 节一样也约请不信道者写出诸如 «古兰经» 那样的一个单章。这个挑战是在
«古兰经» 被声称为引导正直的人达到精神进步最高阶段之后。不信道的人被告知, 假如他们对 «古兰经» 是源自安拉有怀疑的话, 他们应该写出一章, 使之可与 «古兰经» 对其信者那样产生精神影响方面相比拟。请看我会出版的英文较大版本的古兰注释 (The Larger Edition of Commentary, PP.58-62)。
以上解说可以表明, 这些约请不信教的人写出诸如 «古兰经» 的挑战十分明显而一一分开的, 这些挑战始终存在, 其中没有一个可以替代或取消另一个。可是, 由于 «古兰经» 包含崇高的思想, 必然要用最美丽的措词与最简洁朴实的风格来作为表示那些思想的工具; 否则它的主题就会含糊不清, 使人产生疑问, «古兰经» 的绝美经文就会损毁。这样, 不论用什么形式, 不论在哪一方面, 不信教的人所受到的写出类如 «古兰经» 的文章的挑战, 文体优美与措词雅致使之与 «古兰经» 媲美, 都形成其挑战的一部分。
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Qur’an has been dealt with at five different places, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89 & 52:34, 35. In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. At first sight this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruous. But it is not so. In fact, these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time. The challenge is open even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Qur’an as it was in the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that their mention in the Qur’an is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in the present verse which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be safely concluded that there
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
Important Words:
عبد (servant). For the root meaning of the word see note under 1:5. As explained there, the verb عبد means, he showed complete submissiveness and humility; or he received the imprint of a thing. So عبد would mean a person who, through complete submission and humility to God, has become, as it were, an image of God. The word has been used here about the Holy Prophet by way of endearment and is expressive of the exalted position he holds in the sight of God.
شھداء (helpers) is the plural of شھید which is derived from شھد i.e. he was present; or he gave witness, etc. Thus شھیدmeans, one who is present; one who sees or witnesses; one who gives testimony or evidence; one who possesses much knowledge; one from whose knowledge nothing is hidden (Aqrab & Lane); also a helper (Mufradat). Following the last mentioned signification the word may also refer here to the Jews who were friends of the disbelievers (5:81) and spoke of the idolaters as being better guided in religion than those who believe (4:52).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses the Quran gave its first commandment to the people. Having been thus directly addressed by God, the polytheistic disbelievers felt a natural reaction to repudiate the monotheistic teaching of the Quran, because they felt that its acceptance meant that they should give up their long cherished beliefs.
In the present verse God says that if the Quran created doubts and disquietude in their minds and is not worthy of acceptance, the disbelievers should produce one like it. If they cannot, then this very fact would prove them to be wrong.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Quran, has been dealt with at five different places in the Quran, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89; & 52:34, 35, and disbelievers have been challenged, to produce its equal.
In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. Thus, to begin with the largest demand in 17:89, disbelievers are challenged to produce the like of the whole Quran, and they have been told that even if all jinn and men should join together, they would not be able to produce it. In 11:14 the challenge is limited to the production of ten chapters. In 2:24 and 10:39, however, it has been confined to one Surah only; while in 52:34-35, the condition of even one Surahhas been omitted and disbelievers have been given the option of producing even a single narration similar to any one narration (i.e. announcement) of the Quran. On the face of it, this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruent and to spring from a lack of harmony in the Quran. Some commentators have endeavoured to explain away this seeming incongruity by saying that it was due to the challenge having been made at different times. At first disbelievers were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran. When they failed to do so, the challenge was whittled down to the production of the like of any ten chapters. When, however, they were unable to produce even ten chapters, the challenge was further reduced to the production of a single chapter; and, lastly, disbelievers were asked to produce even a single narration like any narration of the Quran. This explanation, however, does not seem to be satisfactory. The different Surahs containing these different challenges were revealed, in the following order: (1) 52:34, 35; (2) 17:89; (3) 11:14; (4) 10:39; (5) 2:24 (Rodwell). Now in Surah 52, the first to be revealed, the challenge is not qualified by any condition as regards size, disbelievers having been given the choice of producing even one single narration similar to any narration of the Quran. It is very strange that, whereas at first the challenge was unqualified and disbelievers were called upon to produce something comparable to any narration of the Quran, later it began to be hedged round by conditions and stipulations, first requiring disbelievers to produce the like of the whole book, then reducing the challenge to ten Surahs, and last of all reducing it to a single chapter. The order is most unnatural.
Moreover, some of the Surahs which contain this challenge were revealed on occasions so close to one another that some commentators have found it difficult to fix their order of priority with certainty. Hence it is unwise to settle this question on the basis of the chronological order of the Surahs containing this challenge.
Another point worth considering in this connection is that the verses in question do not mention any historical event but contain only a general challenge which stands for all time. Now the question is, in what form should the challenge be delivered to the world? Should disbelievers be called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran, or to produce ten Surahs like any ten Surahs of the Quran, or should they be called upon to bring forward the like of one Surah only or the like of any single piece of the Quran? If it is enough to make a demand for the like of a single piece of the Quran, why should a demand for the like of a Surah be made, and if it is enough to make a demand for the like of one Surah, the demand for the production of ten Surahs or, for that matter, for the whole of the Quran seems extravagant.
The fact is that these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time, and there is no need to enter into the question of their chronological order. The challenge can be made even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Quran as it was made at the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that mention of them in the Quran is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in 2:24, which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be concluded that there exists a close connection between the question of wealth and power and the challenge for the production of the like of the Quran or a part thereof. This connection lies in the fact that the Quran has been held out to disbelievers as a priceless treasure. When disbelievers demanded material treasures from the Holy Prophet and asked, Wherefore has not a treasure been sent down to him (11:13), they were told in reply that he possessed a matchless treasure in the Quran. The same reply was repeated when disbelievers asked, Wherefore has not an angel come with him? (11:13). They were told in reply that angels did descend upon him; for their function was to bring the word of God, and the Divine Word had already been vouchsafed to him. Thus both the demand for a treasure and the demand for the descent of angels have been jointly met by offering the Quran as a matchless treasure brought down by angels, and the challenge to produce the like of the Quran has been put forward as a proof of its peerless quality.
Let us now take the different verses containing this challenge separately. The greatest demand is that made in 17:89, where disbelievers are required to bring a book like the whole of the Quran in all its manifold qualities. In this verse disbelievers are not required to represent their composition as the word of God. They may bring it forward as their own composition and declare it to be the equal of or, for that matter, better than the Quran. As, however, it was necessary to define in what respect the work to be produced was to resemble the Quran, the Quran says in the next verse, And of a truth We have (herein) set forth for mankind in various ways, all kinds of similitudes, but most of men would reject everything but disbelief (17:90), hinting thereby that if disbelievers reject the Divine origin of the Quran and believe it to be the work of the Prophet himself, then let them produce a book which, like the Quran, should possess the following excellences: (a) it should throw light on every essential subject pertaining to religion; (b) its discussion of these subjects should be exhaustive, offering detailed guidance on every question; (c) it should be free from all harm and contain nothing but good; and (d) it should aim not at the good of any particular people or community but at the well-being of all mankind, containing guidance for all temperaments and dispositions as well as for all circumstances and conditions. But as at the time when this challenge was made the whole of the Quran had not yet been revealed, disbelievers were not required to produce the like of the Quran there and then; and the challenge thus implied a prophecy that they would not be able to produce the like of it, neither in the form in which it then was nor when it became complete. Again, the challenge was not confined to the disbelievers of the Prophet’s time alone, but extended to doubters and critics of all times.
The second verse which contains a challenge is 11:14. In this verse the disbelievers’ objection that the Prophet had not come with a treasure, nor had an angel come to him, has been met by calling upon them to bring similar Surahswhich they should represent as the word of God. The latter demand, i.e. that pertaining to the representation of the required production as the word of God, has a reference to the objection of the disbelievers that no angel has come down to the Prophet. They are told that if no angel has really come to him and his claim to receive divine revelation through the medium of angels is false, then let them also produce ten Surahs, claiming, like him, that they have been brought down to them by angels, and then see what their end would be. If they had not the courage to forge a lie against God, how could they think that the Prophet could be guilty of such fabrication or, if he had dared to commit this forgery, why had he remained secure from God’s punishment?
The reason why the disbelievers in this verse have been called upon to produce ten Surahs and not the whole Quran is that the question here did not relate to the perfection of the Quran in all respects, but to that of only a portion of it. The disbelievers had objected to some parts of it being defective, as is evident from the words: They imagine that thou art now perhaps going to abandon part of that which has been revealed to thee (11:13). Hence, they have not been required here to bring a complete book like the whole Quran, but only ten Surahs in place of those parts of the Quran which they deem to be defective, in order that the truth of their assertion may be tested.
As for the selection of the specific number 10 for this purpose, it should be noted that in Arabic 10 represents a complete number. As the object was to refute the assertion of the disbelievers that certain portions of the Quran were defective, therefore the disbelievers were given the option of making as many as ten efforts to substantiate their claim. They were thus asked to produce ten Surahs not because they could produce less than that number but because the best way to refute their objection was to afford them several opportunities to substantiate the truth of their assertion. In short, since in 17:89 the whole Quran was claimed to be a perfect Book, its opponents were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran; but since in 11:14 the point was that certain portions of it were objected to, so they were asked to choose ten such portions as appeared to them to be most defective and then, produce a composition even like those portions.
The third verse where the Quran has been declared to be matchless is 10:39. Here disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of only one Surah of the Quran. This is so because, unlike the above-mentioned two verses, the challenge made in this verse is in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. In the verses preceding 10:39, it was claimed that God possessed full authority over all things (see 10:32-36), and as a proof of this, in 10:38 the Quran was put forward as possessing the following excellences: (a) it contains teachings which could not be devised by man; (b) it has come in fulfilment of the prophecies contained in the previous Scriptures; (c) in it the imperfect teachings of the previous Scriptures have been perfected; (d) the word of God embodied in it has been made secure from being interpolated or tampered with by man; and (e) its teachings are meant for all men and all time. In support of this claim, verse 10:39 throws out a challenge to those who deny or doubt it to produce a single chapter containing these excellences in the same perfect form in which they are contained in this chapter, i.e. ch.10.
The verses 52:34, 35 contain the smallest of all demands. In these verses disbelievers are challenged to produce a single piece or a single announcement like any piece or announcement of the Quran. This demand also has been made in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. Hence the smallness of the demand. The claim in question is made in the opening verses of chapter 52, i.e. Surah At-Tur, to the effect that the Quranic revelation which was promised to mankind through Moses on Mount Sinai, will continue to be written, read and published throughout the world and that its followers will continue to multiply and will comprise not only common men but persons of great spiritual and temporal eminence, and that the fountain of the new faith will continue to provide the water of eternal life to all the countries of the world so that the fulfilment of these prophecies will constitute a proof of the fact that there is a Day of Judgement. Thereafter the Quran proceeds in 52:34, 35 to challenge disbelievers that, if they look upon the revelation of the Quran to be a fabrication, then they should come forward and make a prophecy like the one made above. This challenge is unconditional and without qualification. Disbelievers are not required to represent what they produce as the word of God, nor is it laid down as a condition that their prophecy should be of their own devising. They may as they like either make a prophecy of their own devising or borrow it from any other Scripture. Again, disbelievers are not asked to bring forward as many prophecies as there are in the Quran—and these are legion—but to bring forward only one single prophecy similar to any one of the prophecies made in the beginning of the Surah. They are told that they will not be able to fulfil this demand, for such a prophecy could be made only by the Being Who is the Creator and Owner of the heavens and the earth, along with their treasures, and Who not only knows, but possesses mastery of, the unseen. This challenge also stands for all time.
The fifth challenge to produce a like of the Quran is contained in the verse under comment (2:24) and here also, as in 10:39, disbelievers have been called upon to bring a Surah like that of the Quran, not in refutation of any of their objections, but in support of a claim made by the Quran itself. In the case of the verse under comment this claim is stated in the beginning of the Surah in 2:3 which says: This is a perfect Book; there is no doubt in it; it is a guidance for the righteous. Similarly, 10:39 is also preceded with the words: there is no doubt about it (10:38). This shows that the challenge to produce a chapter like one of the Quran has special reference to the peculiarity which is described by the words, there is no doubt about it. The challenge given in the present Surah is preceded by the claim that the Quran is a guidance for those who fear God (2:3), which means that it guides the righteous to the highest stages of spiritual progress. Hence in the above challenge it has been declared that if disbelievers are in doubt as to the Divine origin of the Quran, then they should bring forward a Surah that may be comparable to the Quran in the spiritual influence it exercises over its followers.
One of the characteristics of the Quran is that, whatever chapter of it we may read, it casts a subtle and sublime spiritual influence over our minds. Thus, instead of creating doubts it dispels them and takes men to a stage where no doubt can possibly survive, which is the stage of communion with God. This stage can be attained only by the study of the Quran; no other Book can compare with it in this respect.
The above explanation will show that all these challenges calling upon disbelievers to produce the like of the Quran are quite distinct and separate one from another, and all of them stand for all time, none of them superseding or cancelling any other. The misconception that these challenges are one and the same seems to have arisen from the wrong notion that in all of them it is the elegance of the Quranic style and diction that has been held out as unique and incomparable and that it is such elegance of Arabic diction that disbelievers have been called upon to produce. But this is not the case. The challenges made in the five Surahs referred to above are not one or identical nor do they make the same demand; each has a distinct and separate demand of its own and it is in keeping with the nature of these demands that disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran or a part of it.
The question now remains whether these demands also include a challenge to produce a work comparable to the Quran in elegance of style and diction. The answer is that they certainly do so, but only in an indirect way and not as a direct and fundamental demand, for sublime ideas can only be expressed in sublime language. As the Quran comprises sublime and lofty ideas, it was inevitable that the most beautiful diction and the most chaste style should have been employed as the vehicle for the expression of those ideas; otherwise, the subject matter was liable to remain obscure and doubtful and the perfect beauty of the Quran would have become marred. Thus, in whatever form and in whatever respect disbelievers have been challenged to produce a composition like the Quran, the demand for beauty of style and elegance of diction comparable to those of the Quran also forms a part of the challenge.
d
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
29Q
«古兰经» 无可比拟的优美绝伦的主题, 在五个不同的地方被述及, 即: 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89与52:34, 35中。五处中有两处 (2:24与10:39) 的挑战是相同的, 而在其余三处, 曾向不信道的人提出了三个不同的要求。初看, 三个不同地方的挑战的不同形式似乎不协调。其实并非如此。实际上, 这些经文内一定的要求是时常存在的, 挑战在穆圣时代, 甚至到现在, 在 «古兰经» 所述及的所有不同形式中都是开放的。
在解释这些不同形式挑战以前, 值得注意的是: «古兰经» 提到这些要求时, 始终不忘财产与权力。如前所述, 除了在本节经文中, 没有新的挑战, 而只是重复10:39 中的那个挑战, 由此得到一个肯定的结论:在财产与权力问题和创作像 «古兰经» 或其一部分的挑战之间存在着一种紧密的连系。这一连系在于这样一个事实:即 «古兰经» 是以一种无价之宝向不信道的人提出的。当不信道的人向穆圣要求各种物质财宝时 (11:13), 他告诉他们, 他的 «古兰经» 是他的无与伦比的财宝; 当他们问: “为什么没有一个天使同他一起来?” (11:13) 他回答他们说, 天使确已降临于他, 因为天使们的使命是带来主的启示, 而主的启示已赐给了他。因此, 这两种要求—对于财宝与天使降临的要求—已由天使带来的无与伦比的财宝 «古兰经» 全被满足了, 创作此类天经的挑战是为证明它的无可匹敌的素质而提出的。
现在可以把含有这项挑战的不同经文分开来看。17:89 中提出的最大一个要求, 要求不信道的人拿一本具有像 «古兰经» 全文那样包含多种多样素质的书来。那节经文中并不要求不信道的人把他们的文章做为主的言语陈述。他们可以拿出他们自己的文章并宣称它可与 «古兰经» 相提并论, 或甚至超过 古兰经»。但是, 由于当时提出那个挑战时, 全部 «古兰经» 尚未降下, 并不要求不信道的人当时当地写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经文; 这种挑战因此暗示他们永远也写不出像 «古兰经» 那样的文章, 既写不出当时那种形式的
«古兰经», 也将写不出像将要降示完整的 «古兰经»。而且, 此一挑战并不只局限於穆圣时代的不信道的人, 也可延续到所有时代抱有疑问的人以及评论家。在11:14 节经文中, 不信道的人们被约照写十章而不是写全部 «古兰经», 理由是, 那节经文中的问题并不全面涉及整部 «古兰经» 的完美而是仅涉及其部分的完美。不信道的人反对其中某些部分, 说它们有缺陷。因此, 未曾要求他们写出像全部 «古兰经» 那样一本完整的经典, 而只是用十章来替代他们认为有缺陷的那些 «古兰经» 部分, 这样就可检验它们主张的真实性。说到选择十章这个特定数目, 可以这么说, 因为在17:89 中, 全部 «古兰经» 被声称为一部完美无缺的经典, 反对 «古兰经» 的人就被约照写 «古兰经» 那样的全部经典; 但是在11:14 节经文中的问题是, 某些部分受到反对, 因此请他们挑选他们认为最有缺陷的十个部分, 然后写出类似那些部分的文章。在10:39 节中, 只要求不信教的人写出类似 «古兰经» 中的一章。这是因为, 不像上述的两节经文, 那节经文的挑战是支持 «古兰经» 本身所作出的一个宣称, 而不是驳斥不信教者的反对意见的。在10:38节经文中, «古兰经» 声称有五种非常显著的特点。为了支持这一声称, 10:39 节经文对那些否认或怀疑它的人们提出一个挑战, 要他们以同样完美的形式写出一个单章, 其中要含有像第十章所含有的这些素质。第五次挑战写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经典, 是在这节注释 (2:24) 经文中, 这节像10:39 节一样也约请不信道者写出诸如 «古兰经» 那样的一个单章。这个挑战是在
«古兰经» 被声称为引导正直的人达到精神进步最高阶段之后。不信道的人被告知, 假如他们对 «古兰经» 是源自安拉有怀疑的话, 他们应该写出一章, 使之可与 «古兰经» 对其信者那样产生精神影响方面相比拟。请看我会出版的英文较大版本的古兰注释 (The Larger Edition of Commentary, PP.58-62)。
以上解说可以表明, 这些约请不信教的人写出诸如 «古兰经» 的挑战十分明显而一一分开的, 这些挑战始终存在, 其中没有一个可以替代或取消另一个。可是, 由于 «古兰经» 包含崇高的思想, 必然要用最美丽的措词与最简洁朴实的风格来作为表示那些思想的工具; 否则它的主题就会含糊不清, 使人产生疑问, «古兰经» 的绝美经文就会损毁。这样, 不论用什么形式, 不论在哪一方面, 不信教的人所受到的写出类如 «古兰经» 的文章的挑战, 文体优美与措词雅致使之与 «古兰经» 媲美, 都形成其挑战的一部分。
a
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
30
Important Words:
عبد (servant). For the root meaning of the word see note under 1:5. As explained there, the verb عبد means, he showed complete submissiveness and humility; or he received the imprint of a thing. So عبد would mean a person who, through complete submission and humility to God, has become, as it were, an image of God. The word has been used here about the Holy Prophet by way of endearment and is expressive of the exalted position he holds in the sight of God.
شھداء (helpers) is the plural of شھید which is derived from شھد i.e. he was present; or he gave witness, etc. Thus شھیدmeans, one who is present; one who sees or witnesses; one who gives testimony or evidence; one who possesses much knowledge; one from whose knowledge nothing is hidden (Aqrab & Lane); also a helper (Mufradat). Following the last mentioned signification the word may also refer here to the Jews who were friends of the disbelievers (5:81) and spoke of the idolaters as being better guided in religion than those who believe (4:52).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses the Quran gave its first commandment to the people. Having been thus directly addressed by God, the polytheistic disbelievers felt a natural reaction to repudiate the monotheistic teaching of the Quran, because they felt that its acceptance meant that they should give up their long cherished beliefs.
In the present verse God says that if the Quran created doubts and disquietude in their minds and is not worthy of acceptance, the disbelievers should produce one like it. If they cannot, then this very fact would prove them to be wrong.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Quran, has been dealt with at five different places in the Quran, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89; & 52:34, 35, and disbelievers have been challenged, to produce its equal.
In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. Thus, to begin with the largest demand in 17:89, disbelievers are challenged to produce the like of the whole Quran, and they have been told that even if all jinn and men should join together, they would not be able to produce it. In 11:14 the challenge is limited to the production of ten chapters. In 2:24 and 10:39, however, it has been confined to one Surah only; while in 52:34-35, the condition of even one Surahhas been omitted and disbelievers have been given the option of producing even a single narration similar to any one narration (i.e. announcement) of the Quran. On the face of it, this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruent and to spring from a lack of harmony in the Quran. Some commentators have endeavoured to explain away this seeming incongruity by saying that it was due to the challenge having been made at different times. At first disbelievers were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran. When they failed to do so, the challenge was whittled down to the production of the like of any ten chapters. When, however, they were unable to produce even ten chapters, the challenge was further reduced to the production of a single chapter; and, lastly, disbelievers were asked to produce even a single narration like any narration of the Quran. This explanation, however, does not seem to be satisfactory. The different Surahs containing these different challenges were revealed, in the following order: (1) 52:34, 35; (2) 17:89; (3) 11:14; (4) 10:39; (5) 2:24 (Rodwell). Now in Surah 52, the first to be revealed, the challenge is not qualified by any condition as regards size, disbelievers having been given the choice of producing even one single narration similar to any narration of the Quran. It is very strange that, whereas at first the challenge was unqualified and disbelievers were called upon to produce something comparable to any narration of the Quran, later it began to be hedged round by conditions and stipulations, first requiring disbelievers to produce the like of the whole book, then reducing the challenge to ten Surahs, and last of all reducing it to a single chapter. The order is most unnatural.
Moreover, some of the Surahs which contain this challenge were revealed on occasions so close to one another that some commentators have found it difficult to fix their order of priority with certainty. Hence it is unwise to settle this question on the basis of the chronological order of the Surahs containing this challenge.
Another point worth considering in this connection is that the verses in question do not mention any historical event but contain only a general challenge which stands for all time. Now the question is, in what form should the challenge be delivered to the world? Should disbelievers be called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran, or to produce ten Surahs like any ten Surahs of the Quran, or should they be called upon to bring forward the like of one Surah only or the like of any single piece of the Quran? If it is enough to make a demand for the like of a single piece of the Quran, why should a demand for the like of a Surah be made, and if it is enough to make a demand for the like of one Surah, the demand for the production of ten Surahs or, for that matter, for the whole of the Quran seems extravagant.
The fact is that these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time, and there is no need to enter into the question of their chronological order. The challenge can be made even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Quran as it was made at the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that mention of them in the Quran is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in 2:24, which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be concluded that there exists a close connection between the question of wealth and power and the challenge for the production of the like of the Quran or a part thereof. This connection lies in the fact that the Quran has been held out to disbelievers as a priceless treasure. When disbelievers demanded material treasures from the Holy Prophet and asked, Wherefore has not a treasure been sent down to him (11:13), they were told in reply that he possessed a matchless treasure in the Quran. The same reply was repeated when disbelievers asked, Wherefore has not an angel come with him? (11:13). They were told in reply that angels did descend upon him; for their function was to bring the word of God, and the Divine Word had already been vouchsafed to him. Thus both the demand for a treasure and the demand for the descent of angels have been jointly met by offering the Quran as a matchless treasure brought down by angels, and the challenge to produce the like of the Quran has been put forward as a proof of its peerless quality.
Let us now take the different verses containing this challenge separately. The greatest demand is that made in 17:89, where disbelievers are required to bring a book like the whole of the Quran in all its manifold qualities. In this verse disbelievers are not required to represent their composition as the word of God. They may bring it forward as their own composition and declare it to be the equal of or, for that matter, better than the Quran. As, however, it was necessary to define in what respect the work to be produced was to resemble the Quran, the Quran says in the next verse, And of a truth We have (herein) set forth for mankind in various ways, all kinds of similitudes, but most of men would reject everything but disbelief (17:90), hinting thereby that if disbelievers reject the Divine origin of the Quran and believe it to be the work of the Prophet himself, then let them produce a book which, like the Quran, should possess the following excellences: (a) it should throw light on every essential subject pertaining to religion; (b) its discussion of these subjects should be exhaustive, offering detailed guidance on every question; (c) it should be free from all harm and contain nothing but good; and (d) it should aim not at the good of any particular people or community but at the well-being of all mankind, containing guidance for all temperaments and dispositions as well as for all circumstances and conditions. But as at the time when this challenge was made the whole of the Quran had not yet been revealed, disbelievers were not required to produce the like of the Quran there and then; and the challenge thus implied a prophecy that they would not be able to produce the like of it, neither in the form in which it then was nor when it became complete. Again, the challenge was not confined to the disbelievers of the Prophet’s time alone, but extended to doubters and critics of all times.
The second verse which contains a challenge is 11:14. In this verse the disbelievers’ objection that the Prophet had not come with a treasure, nor had an angel come to him, has been met by calling upon them to bring similar Surahswhich they should represent as the word of God. The latter demand, i.e. that pertaining to the representation of the required production as the word of God, has a reference to the objection of the disbelievers that no angel has come down to the Prophet. They are told that if no angel has really come to him and his claim to receive divine revelation through the medium of angels is false, then let them also produce ten Surahs, claiming, like him, that they have been brought down to them by angels, and then see what their end would be. If they had not the courage to forge a lie against God, how could they think that the Prophet could be guilty of such fabrication or, if he had dared to commit this forgery, why had he remained secure from God’s punishment?
The reason why the disbelievers in this verse have been called upon to produce ten Surahs and not the whole Quran is that the question here did not relate to the perfection of the Quran in all respects, but to that of only a portion of it. The disbelievers had objected to some parts of it being defective, as is evident from the words: They imagine that thou art now perhaps going to abandon part of that which has been revealed to thee (11:13). Hence, they have not been required here to bring a complete book like the whole Quran, but only ten Surahs in place of those parts of the Quran which they deem to be defective, in order that the truth of their assertion may be tested.
As for the selection of the specific number 10 for this purpose, it should be noted that in Arabic 10 represents a complete number. As the object was to refute the assertion of the disbelievers that certain portions of the Quran were defective, therefore the disbelievers were given the option of making as many as ten efforts to substantiate their claim. They were thus asked to produce ten Surahs not because they could produce less than that number but because the best way to refute their objection was to afford them several opportunities to substantiate the truth of their assertion. In short, since in 17:89 the whole Quran was claimed to be a perfect Book, its opponents were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran; but since in 11:14 the point was that certain portions of it were objected to, so they were asked to choose ten such portions as appeared to them to be most defective and then, produce a composition even like those portions.
The third verse where the Quran has been declared to be matchless is 10:39. Here disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of only one Surah of the Quran. This is so because, unlike the above-mentioned two verses, the challenge made in this verse is in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. In the verses preceding 10:39, it was claimed that God possessed full authority over all things (see 10:32-36), and as a proof of this, in 10:38 the Quran was put forward as possessing the following excellences: (a) it contains teachings which could not be devised by man; (b) it has come in fulfilment of the prophecies contained in the previous Scriptures; (c) in it the imperfect teachings of the previous Scriptures have been perfected; (d) the word of God embodied in it has been made secure from being interpolated or tampered with by man; and (e) its teachings are meant for all men and all time. In support of this claim, verse 10:39 throws out a challenge to those who deny or doubt it to produce a single chapter containing these excellences in the same perfect form in which they are contained in this chapter, i.e. ch.10.
The verses 52:34, 35 contain the smallest of all demands. In these verses disbelievers are challenged to produce a single piece or a single announcement like any piece or announcement of the Quran. This demand also has been made in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. Hence the smallness of the demand. The claim in question is made in the opening verses of chapter 52, i.e. Surah At-Tur, to the effect that the Quranic revelation which was promised to mankind through Moses on Mount Sinai, will continue to be written, read and published throughout the world and that its followers will continue to multiply and will comprise not only common men but persons of great spiritual and temporal eminence, and that the fountain of the new faith will continue to provide the water of eternal life to all the countries of the world so that the fulfilment of these prophecies will constitute a proof of the fact that there is a Day of Judgement. Thereafter the Quran proceeds in 52:34, 35 to challenge disbelievers that, if they look upon the revelation of the Quran to be a fabrication, then they should come forward and make a prophecy like the one made above. This challenge is unconditional and without qualification. Disbelievers are not required to represent what they produce as the word of God, nor is it laid down as a condition that their prophecy should be of their own devising. They may as they like either make a prophecy of their own devising or borrow it from any other Scripture. Again, disbelievers are not asked to bring forward as many prophecies as there are in the Quran—and these are legion—but to bring forward only one single prophecy similar to any one of the prophecies made in the beginning of the Surah. They are told that they will not be able to fulfil this demand, for such a prophecy could be made only by the Being Who is the Creator and Owner of the heavens and the earth, along with their treasures, and Who not only knows, but possesses mastery of, the unseen. This challenge also stands for all time.
The fifth challenge to produce a like of the Quran is contained in the verse under comment (2:24) and here also, as in 10:39, disbelievers have been called upon to bring a Surah like that of the Quran, not in refutation of any of their objections, but in support of a claim made by the Quran itself. In the case of the verse under comment this claim is stated in the beginning of the Surah in 2:3 which says: This is a perfect Book; there is no doubt in it; it is a guidance for the righteous. Similarly, 10:39 is also preceded with the words: there is no doubt about it (10:38). This shows that the challenge to produce a chapter like one of the Quran has special reference to the peculiarity which is described by the words, there is no doubt about it. The challenge given in the present Surah is preceded by the claim that the Quran is a guidance for those who fear God (2:3), which means that it guides the righteous to the highest stages of spiritual progress. Hence in the above challenge it has been declared that if disbelievers are in doubt as to the Divine origin of the Quran, then they should bring forward a Surah that may be comparable to the Quran in the spiritual influence it exercises over its followers.
One of the characteristics of the Quran is that, whatever chapter of it we may read, it casts a subtle and sublime spiritual influence over our minds. Thus, instead of creating doubts it dispels them and takes men to a stage where no doubt can possibly survive, which is the stage of communion with God. This stage can be attained only by the study of the Quran; no other Book can compare with it in this respect.
The above explanation will show that all these challenges calling upon disbelievers to produce the like of the Quran are quite distinct and separate one from another, and all of them stand for all time, none of them superseding or cancelling any other. The misconception that these challenges are one and the same seems to have arisen from the wrong notion that in all of them it is the elegance of the Quranic style and diction that has been held out as unique and incomparable and that it is such elegance of Arabic diction that disbelievers have been called upon to produce. But this is not the case. The challenges made in the five Surahs referred to above are not one or identical nor do they make the same demand; each has a distinct and separate demand of its own and it is in keeping with the nature of these demands that disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran or a part of it.
The question now remains whether these demands also include a challenge to produce a work comparable to the Quran in elegance of style and diction. The answer is that they certainly do so, but only in an indirect way and not as a direct and fundamental demand, for sublime ideas can only be expressed in sublime language. As the Quran comprises sublime and lofty ideas, it was inevitable that the most beautiful diction and the most chaste style should have been employed as the vehicle for the expression of those ideas; otherwise, the subject matter was liable to remain obscure and doubtful and the perfect beauty of the Quran would have become marred. Thus, in whatever form and in whatever respect disbelievers have been challenged to produce a composition like the Quran, the demand for beauty of style and elegance of diction comparable to those of the Quran also forms a part of the challenge.
d
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
44
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Qur’an has been dealt with at five different places, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89 & 52:34, 35. In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. At first sight this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruous. But it is not so. In fact, these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time. The challenge is open even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Qur’an as it was in the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that their mention in the Qur’an is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in the present verse which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be safely concluded that there
وَمِنۡہُمۡ اُمِّیُّوۡنَ لَا یَعۡلَمُوۡنَ الۡکِتٰبَ اِلَّاۤ اَمَانِیَّ وَاِنۡ ہُمۡ اِلَّا یَظُنُّوۡنَ
Ummiyyun signifies those who follow no revealed Book. The word is plural of Ummiyy which means, one who cannot read or write.
Important Words:
امیون (illiterate persons) is the plural of امی which means, one who can neither write nor read. The word is said to have been derived from ام (mother), for an امی (illiterate person) continues, as it were, the same as when born of his mother (Aqrab). امیalso signifies: (1) one not having a revealed Scripture; (2) one belonging to the Arab nation (Lane).
امانی (false notions) derived from منی is the plural of امنیة meaning: (1) a desire; (2) an object of desire; (3) falsehood; (4) reading or recitation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
There is yet a third class among the Jews who have no knowledge of the Book at all. They have only their own false notions or desires, and, instead of trying to understand the Book and basing their faith on conviction, they depend upon their own whims. Their knowledge is not based on God’s Book. They rather twist the Book according to their own vain desires and false notions. It is a case of the wish being father to the thought. As the word also means, reading or recitation, the verse in this sense would mean that the Jews only know the letter of the Law and have lost all contact with its spirit. They read the Book but do not understand it.
85
Important Words:
امیون (illiterate persons) is the plural of امی which means, one who can neither write nor read. The word is said to have been derived from ام (mother), for an امی (illiterate person) continues, as it were, the same as when born of his mother (Aqrab). امیalso signifies: (1) one not having a revealed Scripture; (2) one belonging to the Arab nation (Lane).
امانی (false notions) derived from منی is the plural of امنیة meaning: (1) a desire; (2) an object of desire; (3) falsehood; (4) reading or recitation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
There is yet a third class among the Jews who have no knowledge of the Book at all. They have only their own false notions or desires, and, instead of trying to understand the Book and basing their faith on conviction, they depend upon their own whims. Their knowledge is not based on God’s Book. They rather twist the Book according to their own vain desires and false notions. It is a case of the wish being father to the thought. As the word also means, reading or recitation, the verse in this sense would mean that the Jews only know the letter of the Law and have lost all contact with its spirit. They read the Book but do not understand it.
113A
Ummiyyun signifies those who follow no revealed Book. The word is plural of Ummiyy which means, one who cannot read or write.
ثُمَّ اَنۡتُمۡ ہٰٓؤُلَآءِ تَقۡتُلُوۡنَ اَنۡفُسَکُمۡ وَتُخۡرِجُوۡنَ فَرِیۡقًا مِّنۡکُمۡ مِّنۡ دِیٰرِہِمۡ تَظٰہَرُوۡنَ عَلَیۡہِمۡ بِالۡاِثۡمِ وَالۡعُدۡوٰنِ وَاِنۡ یَّاۡتُوۡکُمۡ اُسٰرٰی تُفٰدُوۡہُمۡ وَہُوَ مُحَرَّمٌ عَلَیۡکُمۡ اِخۡرَاجُہُمۡ ۚ اَفَتُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ بِبَعۡضِ الۡکِتٰبِ وَتَکۡفُرُوۡنَ بِبَعۡضٍ ۚ فَمَا جَزَآءُ مَنۡ یَّفۡعَلُ ذٰلِکَ مِنۡکُمۡ اِلَّا خِزۡیٌ فِی الۡحَیٰوۃِ الدُّنۡیَا ۖ وَیَوۡمَ الۡقِیٰمَۃِ یُرَدُّوۡنَ اِلٰۤی اَشَدِّ الۡعَذَابِ ۗ وَمَا اللّٰہُ بِغٰفِلٍ عَمَّا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ
There lived in Medina in the time of the Holy Prophet three Jewish tribes, the Banu Qainuqa‘, the Banu Nadir and the Banu Quraizah; and two pagan tribes, the Aus and the Khazraj. Two of the Jewish tribes, Banu Qainuqa‘ and Banu Quraizah, sided with the Aus, and Banu Nadir with the Khazraj. Thus, whenever these pagan clans were at war with each other, the Jewish tribes were automatically involved. But, if during a war any Jews were taken prisoner by the pagans, the former would collect money by subscription and ransom them. They considered it improper for a Jew to remain in bondage with a Gentile. The Qur’an objects to this practice by saying that their Faith not only forbids the enslavement of Jews, but also prohibits mutual warfare and murder in which they openly indulged and there could be nothing worse than to accept a portion of a Scripture and reject the rest; for, when one accepts a portion of a Scripture, it is proof of the fact that one is convinced of the truth of the whole. Thus rejection o
See under 2:87.
92
See under 2:87.
118
There lived in Medina in the time of the Holy Prophet three Jewish tribes, the Banu Qainuqa‘, the Banu Nadir and the Banu Quraizah; and two pagan tribes, the Aus and the Khazraj. Two of the Jewish tribes, Banu Qainuqa‘ and Banu Quraizah, sided with the Aus, and Banu Nadir with the Khazraj. Thus, whenever these pagan clans were at war with each other, the Jewish tribes were automatically involved. But, if during a war any Jews were taken prisoner by the pagans, the former would collect money by subscription and ransom them. They considered it improper for a Jew to remain in bondage with a Gentile. The Qur’an objects to this practice by saying that their Faith not only forbids the enslavement of Jews, but also prohibits mutual warfare and murder in which they openly indulged and there could be nothing worse than to accept a portion of a Scripture and reject the rest; for, when one accepts a portion of a Scripture, it is proof of the fact that one is convinced of the truth of the whole. Thus rejection o
وَکَذٰلِکَ جَعَلۡنٰکُمۡ اُمَّۃً وَّسَطًا لِّتَکُوۡنُوۡا شُہَدَآءَ عَلَی النَّاسِ وَیَکُوۡنَ الرَّسُوۡلُ عَلَیۡکُمۡ شَہِیۡدًا ۗ وَمَا جَعَلۡنَا الۡقِبۡلَۃَ الَّتِیۡ کُنۡتَ عَلَیۡہَاۤ اِلَّا لِنَعۡلَمَ مَنۡ یَّتَّبِعُ الرَّسُوۡلَ مِمَّنۡ یَّنۡقَلِبُ عَلٰی عَقِبَیۡہِ ۚ وَاِنۡ کَانَتۡ لَکَبِیۡرَۃً اِلَّا عَلَی الَّذِیۡنَ ہَدَی اللّٰہُ ۗ وَمَا کَانَ اللّٰہُ لِیُضِیۡعَ اِیۡمٰنَکُمۡ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ بِالنَّاسِ لَرَءُوۡفٌ رَّحِیۡمٌ
3:111.
22:79.
اَلْوَسَط (Al-Wasat) 的意思是处于中间地位; 优越和高贵的地位 (اَقْرَبْ)。此词在这里作优越和高贵的意义解, 在3:111中穆斯林也被称为最优越的民族。
这里告诉穆斯林, 他们每一代都应保卫和注意下一代。作为最优越的民族, 他们就有责任始终防止降低他们所应有的很高的人生标准, 并留意每一代也都沿着享有穆圣的崇高同伴的荣誉的人们所追随的道路前进。因此穆圣应当是他的直接继承者的监护人, 而他们同时应依次成为自己的接班人的监护人, 如此等等。此话也可含意为, 根据天命, 穆斯林应成为人类的领袖, 并按他们的善行, 接受安拉特别恩惠, 因而其他人们势必得出结论, 穆斯林信奉一门真正的宗教。这样, 他们将为其他人证明伊斯兰教的真理, 就象穆圣对他们说来是这一宗教真理的见证人。
阿拉伯人非常热爱天房这麦加的古代礼拜寺。这是从伊布拉欣时代留传给他们的民族禁寺。因此要他们在伊斯兰教一开始就放弃天房而接受有经人朝向即耶路撒冷的圣寺时, 真是对他们的一个严峻的考验{布哈理和جَرِيْر (Jarir)}。之后在麦地那, 把耶路撒冷的圣寺的朝向改为天房, 这证明对犹太教徒和基督教徒都是一个极大的考验。因此, 这种更改证明对 “有经人” 和穆斯林以及对麦加的偶像崇拜者也都是一种考验。
从这些话中可以看出, 穆圣已按安拉的指令选定了耶路撒冷的圣寺作为他的朝向; 但由于安拉本来打算把它只作为临时的朝向而以后准备代之以供全人类永远朝向的天房, 因此关于临时性的朝向的命令在 «古兰经» 中是没有的。这表明所有临时性应用的指示不被包括在 «古兰经» 启示内; 只有那些属于永久性的指示才包括在内。«古兰经» 含有一些现在已经废弃的经文的这种见解是绝无事实根据的。
3:111.
22:79.
Al-Wasat means, occupying the middle position; good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). The word is used here in the sense of good and exalted. In 3:111 also Muslims have been called the best people.
Muslims are here told that each generation of theirs should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus, the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on. The words may also mean that, as decreed, Muslims are to become the leaders of men and by their good deeds are to become recipients of God’s special favours, and thus other people will be forced to the conclusion that they follow a true religion. In this way they (Muslims) will bear witness to the truth of Islam for other people, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
It appears from these words that the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Qiblah for all mankind for all times, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Qur’an. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quranic revelation; only those of a permanent nature were included in it. The theory that the Qur’an contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam to abandon it in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book (Bukhari & Jarir). And later on at Medina the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. Thus the change proved a trial for both the "People of the Book" and the Muslims and also for the Meccan idolaters.
3:111.
22:79.
Important Words:
وسطا (exalted) is derived from وسط meaning, he stood in between two things. وسط فی حسبه (wasata) or وسط (wasuta) means, he was or became good and noble. الوسط means: (1) occupying the middle position or taking the middle course; (2) good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). That the word وسط is used here in the sense of good and exalted, is clear from 3:111 where Muslims are called the best people.
لنعلم (that We might know) signifies that We may make known or distinguish. In fact, God being Omniscient knows all things; so He does not stand in need of knowing a thing because everything is already known to Him. The word has been used elsewhere also in this sense (33:51). The expression ممن (from him who) occurring after it also shows that the word is used here in the sense of distinguishing or making known to the people.
Commentary:
The clause, and thus have We made you an exalted nation, refers to, and is connected with, the concluding clause of the preceding verse, i.e. He guides whom He pleases to the right path. God means to say that whatever guidance He sends down to the Muslims is for their own good and it is through His guidance that they have been made an exalted nation. So in the matter of the Qiblah, too, they should be prepared to accept His guidance which is meant for their own good. This will make them "guardians over men" and the Messenger of God a "guardian over the Muslims".
Muslims are told that, as decreed by God, they are to become the leaders of men and win the pleasure of God by their good deeds and that on that account they will naturally become recipients of God’s special favours, with the result that other people will be forced to the conclusion that the religion which they follow is the true religion. In this way will Muslims bear witness to the truth of Islam, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
Another meaning of the clause, that you may be guardians over men, is that each generation of Muslims should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best of people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on.
Taking the particle علی (over) in the clause under discussion to mean "against" and the word شھید (guardian) to mean "witness", which it often does, the clause would mean "that you may be witnesses against men and the Holy Prophet may be a witness against you"; i.e., the Holy Prophet would serve as a mirror for the Muslims by looking into which they would be able to see their own shortcomings, while the lives of true Muslims would serve as a model for other people who, by comparing their lives with those of true Muslims, would see and realize their own defects and correct them accordingly. This state of affairs could be brought about only if Muslims faithfully followed all the behests of God including the one regarding Qiblah, which was important as a rallying-point for the new community.
It may be noted here that, as hinted in the words, and We did not appoint the Qiblah which thou didst follow, the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah, and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Islamic Qiblah for all time, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Quran. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quran; only those were included which were of a permanent nature. Hence the theory that the Quran contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam at Mecca to abandon the Ka‘bah in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book. And later on at Medina, the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. It was very hard for them to abandon their Qiblah for a rival temple which had been held sacred by the pagan Arabs. Thus God provided a trial for both the People of the Book and the idolaters of Mecca.
The Temple of Solomon at Jerusalem was not adopted as Qiblah by the Holy Prophet to conciliate the Jewish population of Medina, as is wrongly supposed by Sale and other Christian critics, because it was not at Medina that this Temple was adopted as the Qiblah. It had already been the Qiblah of the Muslims at Mecca where there was no Jewish or Christian population to placate (Bukhari & Jarir). If, by appointing a Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had intended to win over a people, the natural course would have been to appoint the Ka‘bah as a Qiblah while at Mecca and turn round to the Temple of Jerusalem while at Medina. But what actually happened was quite the reverse. Moreover, the Quran expressly says that the adoption of neither of the Qiblahs was meant to win over any people to Islam, but was intended only as a trial to distinguish the true believers from those not true.
The words it does not behove Allah to let your faith go in vain have a twofold meaning: (1) that this change of Qiblah is in no way calculated adversely to affect the faith of Muslims but would actually strengthen it; (2) that if Muslims were not directed to turn to the Ka‘bah, they would not inherit the blessings resulting from the prayers of Abraham offered at the time of its building (2:130). It was impossible that the Companions of the Holy Prophet who had displayed such steadfast loyalty and devotion to their noble ideals, should not have been made heirs to the blessings contained in Abraham’s prayers with which the Promised Prophet was to be so closely associated. The faith of Muslims would, as it were, go in vain if they remained detached from the Ka‘bah and did not inherit its blessings.
d
3:111.
e
22:79.
88
اَلْوَسَط (Al-Wasat) 的意思是处于中间地位; 优越和高贵的地位 (اَقْرَبْ)。此词在这里作优越和高贵的意义解, 在3:111中穆斯林也被称为最优越的民族。
89
这里告诉穆斯林, 他们每一代都应保卫和注意下一代。作为最优越的民族, 他们就有责任始终防止降低他们所应有的很高的人生标准, 并留意每一代也都沿着享有穆圣的崇高同伴的荣誉的人们所追随的道路前进。因此穆圣应当是他的直接继承者的监护人, 而他们同时应依次成为自己的接班人的监护人, 如此等等。此话也可含意为, 根据天命, 穆斯林应成为人类的领袖, 并按他们的善行, 接受安拉特别恩惠, 因而其他人们势必得出结论, 穆斯林信奉一门真正的宗教。这样, 他们将为其他人证明伊斯兰教的真理, 就象穆圣对他们说来是这一宗教真理的见证人。
90
阿拉伯人非常热爱天房这麦加的古代礼拜寺。这是从伊布拉欣时代留传给他们的民族禁寺。因此要他们在伊斯兰教一开始就放弃天房而接受有经人朝向即耶路撒冷的圣寺时, 真是对他们的一个严峻的考验{布哈理和جَرِيْر (Jarir)}。之后在麦地那, 把耶路撒冷的圣寺的朝向改为天房, 这证明对犹太教徒和基督教徒都是一个极大的考验。因此, 这种更改证明对 “有经人” 和穆斯林以及对麦加的偶像崇拜者也都是一种考验。
91
从这些话中可以看出, 穆圣已按安拉的指令选定了耶路撒冷的圣寺作为他的朝向; 但由于安拉本来打算把它只作为临时的朝向而以后准备代之以供全人类永远朝向的天房, 因此关于临时性的朝向的命令在 «古兰经» 中是没有的。这表明所有临时性应用的指示不被包括在 «古兰经» 启示内; 只有那些属于永久性的指示才包括在内。«古兰经» 含有一些现在已经废弃的经文的这种见解是绝无事实根据的。
a
3:111.
b
22:79.
150
Important Words:
وسطا (exalted) is derived from وسط meaning, he stood in between two things. وسط فی حسبه (wasata) or وسط (wasuta) means, he was or became good and noble. الوسط means: (1) occupying the middle position or taking the middle course; (2) good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). That the word وسط is used here in the sense of good and exalted, is clear from 3:111 where Muslims are called the best people.
لنعلم (that We might know) signifies that We may make known or distinguish. In fact, God being Omniscient knows all things; so He does not stand in need of knowing a thing because everything is already known to Him. The word has been used elsewhere also in this sense (33:51). The expression ممن (from him who) occurring after it also shows that the word is used here in the sense of distinguishing or making known to the people.
Commentary:
The clause, and thus have We made you an exalted nation, refers to, and is connected with, the concluding clause of the preceding verse, i.e. He guides whom He pleases to the right path. God means to say that whatever guidance He sends down to the Muslims is for their own good and it is through His guidance that they have been made an exalted nation. So in the matter of the Qiblah, too, they should be prepared to accept His guidance which is meant for their own good. This will make them "guardians over men" and the Messenger of God a "guardian over the Muslims".
Muslims are told that, as decreed by God, they are to become the leaders of men and win the pleasure of God by their good deeds and that on that account they will naturally become recipients of God’s special favours, with the result that other people will be forced to the conclusion that the religion which they follow is the true religion. In this way will Muslims bear witness to the truth of Islam, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
Another meaning of the clause, that you may be guardians over men, is that each generation of Muslims should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best of people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on.
Taking the particle علی (over) in the clause under discussion to mean "against" and the word شھید (guardian) to mean "witness", which it often does, the clause would mean "that you may be witnesses against men and the Holy Prophet may be a witness against you"; i.e., the Holy Prophet would serve as a mirror for the Muslims by looking into which they would be able to see their own shortcomings, while the lives of true Muslims would serve as a model for other people who, by comparing their lives with those of true Muslims, would see and realize their own defects and correct them accordingly. This state of affairs could be brought about only if Muslims faithfully followed all the behests of God including the one regarding Qiblah, which was important as a rallying-point for the new community.
It may be noted here that, as hinted in the words, and We did not appoint the Qiblah which thou didst follow, the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah, and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Islamic Qiblah for all time, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Quran. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quran; only those were included which were of a permanent nature. Hence the theory that the Quran contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam at Mecca to abandon the Ka‘bah in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book. And later on at Medina, the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. It was very hard for them to abandon their Qiblah for a rival temple which had been held sacred by the pagan Arabs. Thus God provided a trial for both the People of the Book and the idolaters of Mecca.
The Temple of Solomon at Jerusalem was not adopted as Qiblah by the Holy Prophet to conciliate the Jewish population of Medina, as is wrongly supposed by Sale and other Christian critics, because it was not at Medina that this Temple was adopted as the Qiblah. It had already been the Qiblah of the Muslims at Mecca where there was no Jewish or Christian population to placate (Bukhari & Jarir). If, by appointing a Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had intended to win over a people, the natural course would have been to appoint the Ka‘bah as a Qiblah while at Mecca and turn round to the Temple of Jerusalem while at Medina. But what actually happened was quite the reverse. Moreover, the Quran expressly says that the adoption of neither of the Qiblahs was meant to win over any people to Islam, but was intended only as a trial to distinguish the true believers from those not true.
The words it does not behove Allah to let your faith go in vain have a twofold meaning: (1) that this change of Qiblah is in no way calculated adversely to affect the faith of Muslims but would actually strengthen it; (2) that if Muslims were not directed to turn to the Ka‘bah, they would not inherit the blessings resulting from the prayers of Abraham offered at the time of its building (2:130). It was impossible that the Companions of the Holy Prophet who had displayed such steadfast loyalty and devotion to their noble ideals, should not have been made heirs to the blessings contained in Abraham’s prayers with which the Promised Prophet was to be so closely associated. The faith of Muslims would, as it were, go in vain if they remained detached from the Ka‘bah and did not inherit its blessings.
b
3:111.
c
22:79.
160
Al-Wasat means, occupying the middle position; good and exalted in rank (Aqrab). The word is used here in the sense of good and exalted. In 3:111 also Muslims have been called the best people.
161
Muslims are here told that each generation of theirs should guard and watch over the next generation. Being the best people, it is incumbent upon them to be always on their guard against falling away from the high standard of life expected of them, and to see that each succeeding generation also follows the path pursued by those who enjoyed the ennobling company of the Holy Prophet. Thus, the Holy Prophet was to be a guardian over his immediate followers, while they in turn were to be guardians over their successors, and so on. The words may also mean that, as decreed, Muslims are to become the leaders of men and by their good deeds are to become recipients of God’s special favours, and thus other people will be forced to the conclusion that they follow a true religion. In this way they (Muslims) will bear witness to the truth of Islam for other people, just as the Holy Prophet was a witness of its truth for them.
162
It appears from these words that the Holy Prophet had adopted the Temple at Jerusalem as his Qiblah by God’s command; but as it was meant by God to be only a temporary Qiblah and was to be subsequently replaced by the Ka‘bah which was to be the Qiblah for all mankind for all times, the command with regard to the temporary Qiblah was not included in the Qur’an. This shows that all such commandments as possessed temporary application were not included in the Quranic revelation; only those of a permanent nature were included in it. The theory that the Qur’an contains some verses that now stand abrogated is quite unfounded.
163
The Arabs were greatly attached to the Ka‘bah, the ancient house of worship at Mecca. It was their national Temple which had come down to them from the days of Abraham. It, therefore, proved a severe trial for them when they were asked at the very inception of Islam to abandon it in favour of the Temple at Jerusalem which was the Qiblah of the People of the Book (Bukhari & Jarir). And later on at Medina the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah proved a great trial for both Jews and Christians. Thus the change proved a trial for both the "People of the Book" and the Muslims and also for the Meccan idolaters.
لَیۡسَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ جُنَاحٌ اَنۡ تَبۡتَغُوۡا فَضۡلًا مِّنۡ رَّبِّکُمۡ ۚ فَاِذَاۤ اَفَضۡتُمۡ مِّنۡ عَرَفٰتٍ فَاذۡکُرُوا اللّٰہَ عِنۡدَ الۡمَشۡعَرِ الۡحَرَامِ ۖ وَاذۡکُرُوۡہُ کَمَا ہَدٰٮکُمۡ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ مِّنۡ قَبۡلِہٖ لَمِنَ الضَّآلِّیۡنَ
62:11.
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
因为使尽可能多的穆斯林可以参加朝觐, 所以 «古兰经» 准许朝觐者从事经商和贸易。那些不能随带现金的朝觐者, 可以随带商品而由此挣得钱来支付旅途中的各项费用。
阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是在麦加附近供朝觐者在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 九日的后半段时间驻留的平原或山谷。它距离麦加九英里, 而这学术上称为沃库夫 (وُقُوْف, Wuquf) 的驻留形成了朝觐的一种重要仪式。阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是一个复合词, 意指圣地或知识或认识的方法。
马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram,) 是穆兹达利法 (مُزْدَلِفَة, Muzdalifah) 的一座小山, 位处麦加和阿腊法特之间。穆圣在这里做晚礼和夜礼而且在日出之前通宵忙于礼拜。这里专供在朝觐时默想和祈祷之用。
بعض لوگ کہتے ہیں کہ فَضْل سے مراد اس جگہ تجارت ہے اور میرے نزدیک بھی یہ درست ہے مگر فَضْل سے صرف تجارت مراد لینا ایک وسیع مضمون کو محدود کر دینا ہے۔ درحقیقت آج اسلام کو جس بہت بڑی مصیبت کا سامنا ہے وہ یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں چاروں طرف کفر غالب ہے اور مسلمان جمود اور بے ِحسی کا شکار ہیں ان کے دلوں میں یہ احساس پیدا نہیں ہوتا کہ وہ اسلام کی اشاعت کے لئے اس جنون سے کام لیں جس جنون سے قرون اولیٰ کے مسلمانوں نے کام لیا تھا اور اسلام کو تھوڑے عرصہ میں ہی تمام معلومہ دنیا میں غالب کر دیا تھا۔ پس حج کے ذکر کے ساتھ وَابْتَغُوْا مِنْ فَضْلِ اللّٰہِ فرما کر میرے نزدیک اس ام
المشعر الحرام : یہ حج کا ایک مقام ہے جو عرفات اور منیٰ کے درمیان واقع ہے۔ عرفات سے واپسی پر حاجی رات وہاں گذارتے ہیں۔
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
62:11.
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Qur’an permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those, who cannot take hard cash with them, may carry merchandise and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey.
‘Arafat is a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter part of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as Wuquf forms an important rite of the Pilgrimage. ‘Arafat is a compound word meaning, the sacred place or means of perception or knowledge.
Mash‘arul-Haram is a small hill in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and remained engaged in prayer all night before the rising of the sun. The place is specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca.
62:11.
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
Important Words:
فضل (bounty). See 2:65.
افضتم (you pour forth) is derived from افاض which is again derived from فاض. They say فاض السیل i.e. the flood-water was great in quantity and overflowed the banks. فاضت عینه means, his eye was full of tears, which began to flow down fast. افاض is both transitive and intransitive. They say افاض الماء i.e. he poured out water. افاض القوم من المکان means, the people, who were great in number, poured forth from the house and dispersed. فیاض is one whose charity flows like water (Aqrab).
عرفات (‘Arafat) is the name given to a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter portion of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is about a mile and a half in circuit with sloping sides rising nearly two hundred feet above the level of the adjacent plain. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as وقوف at this place forms the principal factor of Hajj or Pilgrimage. The word is derived from عرف meaning, he knew or recognized.
مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) is the name given to a small hillock in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and offered special prayers to God before the rising of the sun. It is thus a place specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca. The name is a compound of مشعر (from شعر) meaning, the place or means of perception or knowledge, and الحرام (from حرم) meaning, sacred.
Commentary:
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Quran permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those who cannot take hard cash with them may carry merchandise, and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey. This is what is hinted in the clause, it is no sin for you that you seek the bounty of your Lord. Similar permission is granted to those who gather for the Friday Prayers (62:11).
But trade should not interfere with the acts of worship and devotion prescribed in Pilgrimage. Says God, but when you pour forth from ‘Arafat, remember Him as He has guided you. The Holy Prophet used to pass his time in prayer and meditation at Mash‘arul-Haram and the Faithful are warned that trade or any other worldly occupation should not make them forget the real object of Pilgrimage. The word افضتم (pour forth, lit. overflow) also has a metaphorical meaning, i.e. when you return from ‘Arafat, you should not return empty-handed but should return like a vessel full to overflowing with spiritual knowledge and blessings.
The reader will note that عرفات (‘Arafat) and مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) are both attributive names which have now come to be used as proper ones. They are used to draw the attention of the pilgrim to the fact that Hajj should be a source of knowledge and spiritual realization to him and not a mere outward rite, a mere shell, with no inner soul. The word ‘Arafat also hints that it should be a means of mutual introduction and recognition for Muslims coming from different parts of the world.
c
62:11.
d
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
140
因为使尽可能多的穆斯林可以参加朝觐, 所以 «古兰经» 准许朝觐者从事经商和贸易。那些不能随带现金的朝觐者, 可以随带商品而由此挣得钱来支付旅途中的各项费用。
141
阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是在麦加附近供朝觐者在 ذُوالْحِجَّة (Dhul-Hijjah, 十二月) 九日的后半段时间驻留的平原或山谷。它距离麦加九英里, 而这学术上称为沃库夫 (وُقُوْف, Wuquf) 的驻留形成了朝觐的一种重要仪式。阿腊法特 (عَرَفَات, ‘Arafat) 是一个复合词, 意指圣地或知识或认识的方法。
142
马希阿腊耳•赫腊姆 (مَشْعَرُالْحَرَام, Mash‘arul-Haram,) 是穆兹达利法 (مُزْدَلِفَة, Muzdalifah) 的一座小山, 位处麦加和阿腊法特之间。穆圣在这里做晚礼和夜礼而且在日出之前通宵忙于礼拜。这里专供在朝觐时默想和祈祷之用。
1
بعض لوگ کہتے ہیں کہ فَضْل سے مراد اس جگہ تجارت ہے اور میرے نزدیک بھی یہ درست ہے مگر فَضْل سے صرف تجارت مراد لینا ایک وسیع مضمون کو محدود کر دینا ہے۔ درحقیقت آج اسلام کو جس بہت بڑی مصیبت کا سامنا ہے وہ یہ ہے کہ دنیا میں چاروں طرف کفر غالب ہے اور مسلمان جمود اور بے ِحسی کا شکار ہیں ان کے دلوں میں یہ احساس پیدا نہیں ہوتا کہ وہ اسلام کی اشاعت کے لئے اس جنون سے کام لیں جس جنون سے قرون اولیٰ کے مسلمانوں نے کام لیا تھا اور اسلام کو تھوڑے عرصہ میں ہی تمام معلومہ دنیا میں غالب کر دیا تھا۔ پس حج کے ذکر کے ساتھ وَابْتَغُوْا مِنْ فَضْلِ اللّٰہِ فرما کر میرے نزدیک اس ام
2
المشعر الحرام : یہ حج کا ایک مقام ہے جو عرفات اور منیٰ کے درمیان واقع ہے۔ عرفات سے واپسی پر حاجی رات وہاں گذارتے ہیں۔
a
62:11.
b
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
205
Important Words:
فضل (bounty). See 2:65.
افضتم (you pour forth) is derived from افاض which is again derived from فاض. They say فاض السیل i.e. the flood-water was great in quantity and overflowed the banks. فاضت عینه means, his eye was full of tears, which began to flow down fast. افاض is both transitive and intransitive. They say افاض الماء i.e. he poured out water. افاض القوم من المکان means, the people, who were great in number, poured forth from the house and dispersed. فیاض is one whose charity flows like water (Aqrab).
عرفات (‘Arafat) is the name given to a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter portion of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is about a mile and a half in circuit with sloping sides rising nearly two hundred feet above the level of the adjacent plain. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as وقوف at this place forms the principal factor of Hajj or Pilgrimage. The word is derived from عرف meaning, he knew or recognized.
مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) is the name given to a small hillock in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and offered special prayers to God before the rising of the sun. It is thus a place specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca. The name is a compound of مشعر (from شعر) meaning, the place or means of perception or knowledge, and الحرام (from حرم) meaning, sacred.
Commentary:
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Quran permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those who cannot take hard cash with them may carry merchandise, and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey. This is what is hinted in the clause, it is no sin for you that you seek the bounty of your Lord. Similar permission is granted to those who gather for the Friday Prayers (62:11).
But trade should not interfere with the acts of worship and devotion prescribed in Pilgrimage. Says God, but when you pour forth from ‘Arafat, remember Him as He has guided you. The Holy Prophet used to pass his time in prayer and meditation at Mash‘arul-Haram and the Faithful are warned that trade or any other worldly occupation should not make them forget the real object of Pilgrimage. The word افضتم (pour forth, lit. overflow) also has a metaphorical meaning, i.e. when you return from ‘Arafat, you should not return empty-handed but should return like a vessel full to overflowing with spiritual knowledge and blessings.
The reader will note that عرفات (‘Arafat) and مشعرالحرام (Mash‘arul-Haram) are both attributive names which have now come to be used as proper ones. They are used to draw the attention of the pilgrim to the fact that Hajj should be a source of knowledge and spiritual realization to him and not a mere outward rite, a mere shell, with no inner soul. The word ‘Arafat also hints that it should be a means of mutual introduction and recognition for Muslims coming from different parts of the world.
a
2:153, 204; 8:46; 62:11.
c
62:11.
234
As the object of Pilgrimage is that the greatest possible number of Muslims should take part in it, therefore, the Qur’an permits pilgrims to engage in commerce and trade. Those, who cannot take hard cash with them, may carry merchandise and thereby earn money to meet the expenses of the journey.
235
‘Arafat is a plain or valley near Mecca where pilgrims halt in the latter part of the ninth day of Dhul-Hijjah. It is nine miles from Mecca, and the halt technically known as Wuquf forms an important rite of the Pilgrimage. ‘Arafat is a compound word meaning, the sacred place or means of perception or knowledge.
236
Mash‘arul-Haram is a small hill in Muzdalifah, which lies between Mecca and ‘Arafat. Here the Holy Prophet said the evening and the night Prayers and remained engaged in prayer all night before the rising of the sun. The place is specially meant for meditation and prayer in Pilgrimage. It is about six miles from Mecca.
وَاِنۡ عَزَمُوا الطَّلٰقَ فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ سَمِیۡعٌ عَلِیۡمٌ
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
With this verse begins the discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But the right is to be exercised only on very rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
2:230; 33:50; 65:2, 3.
Important Words:
الطلاق (divorce) is derived from طلق. They say طلقت الناقة i.e. the she-camel became loosened and free from the rope which tied her. طلقت المرأة من زوجھا means, the woman left her husband and severed her connection with him. طلق المرأة زوجھا means, the husband divorced his wife. الطلاق therefore, means, breaking of the tie of marriage; divorce (Aqrab).
عزموا (they decide). عزم means, he made up his mind; he decided; he was determined to do a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, after vowing abstinence from his wife, as stated in the preceding verse, the husband decides on divorce, he is free to take that course. But the words, Allah is All-Hearing All-Knowing, warn him that if he is thereby acting unjustly to his wife, he should not think that he can so act with impunity, for Allah is there to hear the supplications of the wife; and even if she does not or cannot pray to God, Allah knows everything.
With this verse begins a discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But this right is to be exercised only on rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
b
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
166
从这节经文起开始讨论伊斯兰教的离婚法令。根据这一法令, 如果合乎法律需要, 那么, 丈夫有权和妻子离婚。不过这种权利只能在非常少的场合以及特殊情况下才能使用。
a
2:230; 33:50; 65:2, 3.
234
Important Words:
الطلاق (divorce) is derived from طلق. They say طلقت الناقة i.e. the she-camel became loosened and free from the rope which tied her. طلقت المرأة من زوجھا means, the woman left her husband and severed her connection with him. طلق المرأة زوجھا means, the husband divorced his wife. الطلاق therefore, means, breaking of the tie of marriage; divorce (Aqrab).
عزموا (they decide). عزم means, he made up his mind; he decided; he was determined to do a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, after vowing abstinence from his wife, as stated in the preceding verse, the husband decides on divorce, he is free to take that course. But the words, Allah is All-Hearing All-Knowing, warn him that if he is thereby acting unjustly to his wife, he should not think that he can so act with impunity, for Allah is there to hear the supplications of the wife; and even if she does not or cannot pray to God, Allah knows everything.
With this verse begins a discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But this right is to be exercised only on rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
a
2:230; 33:50; 65:2.
276
With this verse begins the discussion of the Islamic law of divorce. According to this law, the husband possesses the right to divorce his wife, when legitimate necessity arises. But the right is to be exercised only on very rare occasions and in exceptional circumstances.
۞ وَالۡوٰلِدٰتُ یُرۡضِعۡنَ اَوۡلٰدَہُنَّ حَوۡلَیۡنِ کَامِلَیۡنِ ۖ لِمَنۡ اَرَادَ اَنۡ یُّتِمَّ الرَّضَاعَۃَ ۚ وَعَلَی الۡمَوۡلُوۡدِ لَہٗ رِزۡقُہُنَّ وَکِسۡوَتُہُنَّ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۚ لَا تُکَلَّفُ نَفۡسٌ اِلَّا وُسۡعَہَا ۚ لَا تُضَآرَّ وٰلِدَۃٌۢ بِوَلَدِہَا وَلَا مَوۡلُوۡدٌ لَّہٗ بِوَلَدِہٖ ۚ وَعَلَی الۡوَارِثِ مِثۡلُ ذٰلِکَ ۗ فَاِنۡ اَرَادَا فِصَالًا عَنۡ تَرَاضٍ مِّنۡہُمَا وَتَشَاوُرٍ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡہِمَا ۗ وَاِنۡ اَرَدتُّمۡ اَنۡ تَسۡتَرۡضِعُوۡۤا اَوۡلٰدَکُمۡ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ اِذَا سَلَّمۡتُمۡ مَّاۤ اٰتَیۡتُمۡ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ ۗ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ وَاعۡلَمُوۡۤا اَنَّ اللّٰہَ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ بَصِیۡرٌ
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
31:15; 46:16.
65:7.
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
176
لَا تُضَآرَّ (La Tudarra) 这一用语, 既是主动又是被动语态; 因此它的意思可以是: (1) 母亲不应使父亲由于他的孩子而受苦; (2) 不应使母亲由于她的孩子而受苦; 这里这两种意义都可同等适用。
177
这里用 مَوْلُوْدٌ لَهٗ (Mauludun la-hu, 孩子所归属的人) 这几个字, 而不用较简单的 وَالِد (Walid, 父亲) 这个字, 为的是指出, 具有所生的孩子, 是父亲的固有的权利而且有抚养他孩子的天职。
178
继承一个死者的财产的人, 对他留下的孩子一定要负起抚养成人的责任。
179
孩子吃奶期至多两年。在这时期结束以前, 如果父母同意, 准许提前断奶。这节经文指示, 如果没有母亲的同意, 孩子不能在两年时期结束前断奶。
1
یہاں بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ سے مراد باپ کی مَقدرت ہے کہ امیر اپنی طاقت کے مطابق دے اور غریب اپنی طاقت کے مطابق۔ اس جگہ عام دودھ پلانے والیوں کا ذکر نہیں بلکہ ماؤں کا ہے اور یہ ذکر طلاق کے ضمن میں کیا گیا ہے اور کہا گیا ہے کہ اگر دودھ پلانے والی عورت کو طلاق دی جائے تو بچہ کی خاطر عورت کے لئے یہ ضروری ہے کہ بچے کو دودھ مقررہ مدت تک پلائے اور اس کے بدلہ میں خاوند پر فرض ہے کہ عام مزدور عورت کی طرح نہیں بلکہ اپنی توفیق کے مطابق اسے خرچ دے۔ کیونکہ یہ عورت کے جذبات کو ٹھیس پہنچانے والا ہوگا کہ ایک طرف تو اسے مجبور کیا جائے کہ وہ طلاق کے بعد بھی بچہ کو دودھ پلاتی رہے اور دوسری ط
2
کھانے اور کپڑے سے مراد تمام اخراجات ہیں نہ کہ صرف روٹی اور لباس اور یہ محاورہ ہے تمام ضرورتوں کو پورا کرنے کے متعلق۔
3
یعنی مرد سے یہ مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ اپنی طاقت سے زیادہ خرچ کرے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے اور عورت سے مطالبہ کرنا کہ وہ ایک نوکر کی طرح طلاق کے بعد ایک عرصہ گھر میں گزار دے یہ بھی نامناسب ہے۔
4
یعنی بچہ کو ایک دوسرے پر دباؤ ڈالنے کا ذریعہ نہ بناؤ۔ یہ حکم نہایت لطیف ہے۔ بہت سے نادان اس حرکت کے مرتکب ہوتے ہیں اور نتیجہ یہ ہوتا ہے کہ یا تو بچے ہلاک ہو جاتے ہیں یا ان کی تربیت خراب ہو جاتی ہے۔ اس قسم کا فعل درحقیقت قتل اولاد کے مشابہ ہے اور قرآن کریم نے اس سے روک کر آئندہ اولادوں پر احسان عظیم کیا ہے۔
5
اس آیت سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ بچے کے متعلق دودھ پلانے یا چھڑانے کا فیصلہ قرآن کریم نے نہ مرد کے اختیار میں رکھا ہے نہ عورت کے اختیار میں۔ بلکہ دونوں کو مشترکہ اختیار دیا ہے شاید تمام شرائع کی تاریخ میں یہ منفرد مثال ہے کہ اس طرح اہلی معاملات میں میاں بیوی کو ایک مقام پر کھڑا کرکے برابر کے اختیارات دئیے گئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ شرط ضرور ہے کہ دودھ پلانے کی مدت جو قرآن کریم نے مقرر کی ہے اس سے زیادہ دیر تک دودھ پلانے پر نہ خاوند مجبور کر سکتا ہے نہ عورت زور دے سکتی ہے۔ جب طلاق کے بعد بھی عورت کے جذبات کا اس قدر خیال رکھنے پر خاوند کو مجبور کیا گیا ہے تو ظاہر ہے کہ جو عورت نکاح میں ہے
6
قرآنی الفاظ اٰتَیْتُمْ کے ہیں جن کے لفظی معنے ہیں دے دیا ہے‘ دے چکے ہو۔ لیکن اس طرح ترجمہ کیا جائے تو ترجمہ یہ ہوگا کہ جب تم دے دو۔ جو کچھ تم دے چکے ہو۔ اور ظاہر ہے کہ یہ مراد قرآن مجید کی نہیں ہو سکتی۔ پس ان الفاظ کا ترجمہ کرتے وقت ایک اور قاعدہ کو ملحوظ رکھنا ہوگا جو یہ ہے کہ کبھی ماضی کا صیغہ قطعی فیصلہ پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ چنانچہ قرآن کریم میں دوسرے کئی مقامات پر بھی یہ محاورہ استعمال کیا گیا ہے۔ مثلاً آتا ہے اِذَا قُمْتُمْ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغْسِلُوْا وُجُوْھَکُمْ(المآئدۃ: ۷) یعنی جب تم نماز کے لئے کھڑے ہو تو اپنے مونہوں کو اور ہات
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
240
Important Words:
یرضعن (give suck) is derived from رضع i.e. he (the babe) sucked. ارضعت means, she (the mother or the wet-nurse) gave suck to the child. استرضع means, he arranged for the suckling of the child; he engaged a wet-nurse for it. The infinitive-noun رضاعة signifies sucking. ھذا اخی من الرضاعة means, he is my foster-brother, both having sucked from the breast of the same woman (Aqrab & Lane).
حولین (two years) is the dual of حول (a year) which is the infinitive-noun from حال meaning, it passed and became complete, or it passed from one state to another, or it turned round. A year is called حول because it is a complete measure of time and turns round and round. حول also means strength and power to do a thing as in the well-known formula لاحول ولاقوة الابالله (Aqrab).
وسعھا (its capacity) is derived from وسع meaning, it was sufficiently capacious. وسعت رحمة الله کل شیء means, God’s mercy extends to, and covers, all things. وسع means capacity or power or strength. The infinitive-noun from it is سعة meaning, breadth; extent, capaciousness; capacity and power. ذوسعة means, a man of means or a man of ample means (Aqrab).
تکلف (is burdened) is derived from کلف. They say کلفه امرا i.e. he imposed on him the task of doing a thing, or he tasked him to do a thing. It also means, he ordered him to do a thing which was difficult or troublesome or inconvenient (Lane).
فصال (weaning the child) is derived from فصل which is both transitive and intransitive, meaning, he separated, he divided, he partitioned; or he got separated, he went forth from. فصلت المرأة رضیعھا means, the woman weaned her child, which is also a sort of separation between the woman and her suckling. ھذایوم الفصل means, this is the day when a decision or a distinction shall be made between the parties, i.e. the doers of good and the doers of evil. فصال means, the weaning of a child from its mother or from the woman who suckles it (Taj).
تشاور (consultation) is derived from شار. They say شارالعسل i.e. he extracted honey from the honey-comb. شارالدابة means, he rode the beast in order to try it and ascertain its worth. اشار besides giving the same meaning as شار, also means, he made a thing known, he pointed to a thing, he gave a word of good counsel to a person. شاوره means, he consulted him, he sought his advice and counsel. تشاور means, mutual consultation. مشورة and شوری give similar meanings, i.e. consultation (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a woman is divorced while she is pregnant, the question of the suckling of the child and the expense of bringing it up naturally arises. The verse under comment supplies the answer. It points out that the suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of that period, if the father and the mother both agree on that course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
The expression لاتضار is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause لاتضار والدة بولدھا may therefore mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally good and equitable. The words مولودله (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word والد (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
The clause, and the same is incumbent on the heir, lays down an important social principle. If a father dies leaving behind a child, it is the duty of his heirs to bring up the child and maintain it until it reaches puberty. This shall not be considered an act of favour on their part, but an act of duty. One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind. He who receives a support from another must be prepared to give the same to him, when he may stand in need of it.
a
31:15; 46:16.
b
65:7.
c
2:287; 6:153; 7:43; 23:63; 65:8.
286
The expression, la Tudarra, is both in the active and the passive voice; the clause may, therefore, mean that: (1) the mother shall not make the father suffer on account of her child; and (2) the mother shall not be made to suffer on account of her child; and both meanings are equally applicable here.
287
The words Mauludulla-hu (he to whom the child belongs) have been used here in preference to the simpler word Walid (father), in order to point to the inherent right of the father to possess the child and to his natural responsibility for its maintenance.
288
One who inherits the property of a deceased person is duty bound to bring up the children the latter may leave behind.
288A
The suckling of the child should last for two years at the maximum. But it is allowable to discontinue it before the end of this period, if the father and the mother both agree on this course. The verse also implies that the child is not to be weaned before the end of two years without the consent of its mother.
وَاِنۡ طَلَّقۡتُمُوۡہُنَّ مِنۡ قَبۡلِ اَنۡ تَمَسُّوۡہُنَّ وَقَدۡ فَرَضۡتُمۡ لَہُنَّ فَرِیۡضَۃً فَنِصۡفُ مَا فَرَضۡتُمۡ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ یَّعۡفُوۡنَ اَوۡ یَعۡفُوَا الَّذِیۡ بِیَدِہٖ عُقۡدَۃُ النِّکَاحِ ۚ وَاَنۡ تَعۡفُوۡۤا اَقۡرَبُ لِلتَّقۡوٰی ۚ وَلَا تَنۡسَوُا الۡفَضۡلَ بَیۡنَکُمۡ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ بَصِیۡرٌ
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
184
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
185
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
186
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
1
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
244
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
293
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
294
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
294A
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
اِنۡ تُبۡدُوا الصَّدَقٰتِ فَنِعِمَّا ہِیَ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُخۡفُوۡہَا وَتُؤۡتُوۡہَا الۡفُقَرَآءَ فَہُوَ خَیۡرٌ لَّکُمۡ ۚ وَیُکَفِّرُ عَنۡکُمۡ مِّنۡ سَیِّاٰتِکُمۡ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ خَبِیۡرٌ
نِعِمَّا ھِیَ اصل میں نِعْمَ مَا ھِیَ ہے۔ یعنی یہ بہت اچھی بات ہے۔ یہ مخصوص بالمدح کہلاتا ہے اور اس کا حل نِعْمَ الشَّیْئُ شَیْئًا ہے (املاء ابوالبقاء) جیسے اردو میں کہتے ہیں کہ بس کام تو یہ ہے۔
مِنْ سَیِّاٰ تِکُمْ کے معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ بدیوں سے بعض کو اس کے سبب سے چھپا دے گا‘ مٹا دے گا۔ اور مِنْ زائد بغرضِ تاکید بھی ہو سکتا ہے اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ تمہاری بدیاں بالکل مٹا دے گا۔ اخفش نے اس جگہ یہی معنے کیے ہیں (املاء ابوالبقاء)
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
9:60, 103, 104.
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, open and secret. By giving alms openly a man sets a good example to others which they may imitate. Secret almsgiving in some cases is better, because then one refrains from exposing the poverty of his less fortunate brethren, and there is also little occasion for feeling proud in giving secretly.
The particle min either may have been used for the sake of emphasis, or in the sense of "many" or "some."
9:60, 103, 104.
4:32; 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
Important Words:
یکفر (will remove) is derived from کفر (kaffara) which again is derived from کفر (kafara) for which see 2:7. They say کفر عنه سیئته i.e. (1) He (God) covered or removed, or did away with his sin; (2) He expiated his sin; (3) He effaced or obliterated his sin (Lane).
Commentary:
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, i.e. open and secret. By giving alms openly, a man sets a good example to others and many begin to imitate him. Secret alms-giving is in many cases better, because in this way one refrains from exposing the poverty of his brethren and there is also little occasion for pride in secret giving. It should be noted that the word خیر (better) occurring in the verse is qualified by the words "for You", while the word نعما (well and good) is not so qualified, which points to the fact that whereas secret giving to the poor is better for the giver, open giving may often be conducive to more good for the Community in general.
Again, the particle من (many) in the clause, "many of your sins" may, according to Arabic idiom, either be redundant and used merely for the sake of emphasis, or used in the sense of "many" or "some"; or it denotes ابتداءالغایة i.e. the commencement of the limit. Following these different senses and also keeping in view the different meanings of the word یکفر (will remove), the clause ویکفر عنکم من سیآتکم may be rendered in four different ways: (1) He (God) will certainly remove from you your sins. (2) He will remove from you many or some of your sins. (3) He will expiate many or some of your sins for you. (4) He will certainly obliterate, or efface from you, your sins.
In the first and the fourth rendering, the particle من has been treated as redundant, used for the sake of emphasis only, and therefore it has been omitted in the translation and the word "certainly" has been added. But if we take the word من in the sense of "many" or "some", the meaning of the sentence will be as given in the second and the third rendering.
In the case of the second rendering, the idea is that if we practise charity, those of our sins which are committed against the rights of God will be pardoned, but not those which are committed against the rights of men for which other acts of virtue have been recommended. In the case of the third rendering, the idea is that on the basis of charity practised in accordance with the injunctions of the Quran, God will so arrange that sins committed by the giver of charity, against the rights of men, will be pardoned by the very men who are sinned against.
But as it is possible that even after a man has been pardoned, his sins may continue to rankle in his own mind, so God has promised to show a further favour to those who practise charity according to the teachings of Islam. This promise is implied in the word یکفر (efface and obliterate) which is intended to hint that God will make them forget their sins and thus obliterate and efface from their minds all traces of the sins committed by them. This idea has been expressed in the last rendering. Thus a single small sentence has been so worded as to cover all the possible forms of forgiveness, from its lowest phase to its highest manifestation.
a
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
d
9:60, 103, 104.
1
نِعِمَّا ھِیَ اصل میں نِعْمَ مَا ھِیَ ہے۔ یعنی یہ بہت اچھی بات ہے۔ یہ مخصوص بالمدح کہلاتا ہے اور اس کا حل نِعْمَ الشَّیْئُ شَیْئًا ہے (املاء ابوالبقاء) جیسے اردو میں کہتے ہیں کہ بس کام تو یہ ہے۔
2
مِنْ سَیِّاٰ تِکُمْ کے معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ بدیوں سے بعض کو اس کے سبب سے چھپا دے گا‘ مٹا دے گا۔ اور مِنْ زائد بغرضِ تاکید بھی ہو سکتا ہے اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ تمہاری بدیاں بالکل مٹا دے گا۔ اخفش نے اس جگہ یہی معنے کیے ہیں (املاء ابوالبقاء)
b
9:60, 103, 104.
c
4:32; 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
278
Important Words:
یکفر (will remove) is derived from کفر (kaffara) which again is derived from کفر (kafara) for which see 2:7. They say کفر عنه سیئته i.e. (1) He (God) covered or removed, or did away with his sin; (2) He expiated his sin; (3) He effaced or obliterated his sin (Lane).
Commentary:
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, i.e. open and secret. By giving alms openly, a man sets a good example to others and many begin to imitate him. Secret alms-giving is in many cases better, because in this way one refrains from exposing the poverty of his brethren and there is also little occasion for pride in secret giving. It should be noted that the word خیر (better) occurring in the verse is qualified by the words "for You", while the word نعما (well and good) is not so qualified, which points to the fact that whereas secret giving to the poor is better for the giver, open giving may often be conducive to more good for the Community in general.
Again, the particle من (many) in the clause, "many of your sins" may, according to Arabic idiom, either be redundant and used merely for the sake of emphasis, or used in the sense of "many" or "some"; or it denotes ابتداءالغایة i.e. the commencement of the limit. Following these different senses and also keeping in view the different meanings of the word یکفر (will remove), the clause ویکفر عنکم من سیآتکم may be rendered in four different ways: (1) He (God) will certainly remove from you your sins. (2) He will remove from you many or some of your sins. (3) He will expiate many or some of your sins for you. (4) He will certainly obliterate, or efface from you, your sins.
In the first and the fourth rendering, the particle من has been treated as redundant, used for the sake of emphasis only, and therefore it has been omitted in the translation and the word "certainly" has been added. But if we take the word من in the sense of "many" or "some", the meaning of the sentence will be as given in the second and the third rendering.
In the case of the second rendering, the idea is that if we practise charity, those of our sins which are committed against the rights of God will be pardoned, but not those which are committed against the rights of men for which other acts of virtue have been recommended. In the case of the third rendering, the idea is that on the basis of charity practised in accordance with the injunctions of the Quran, God will so arrange that sins committed by the giver of charity, against the rights of men, will be pardoned by the very men who are sinned against.
But as it is possible that even after a man has been pardoned, his sins may continue to rankle in his own mind, so God has promised to show a further favour to those who practise charity according to the teachings of Islam. This promise is implied in the word یکفر (efface and obliterate) which is intended to hint that God will make them forget their sins and thus obliterate and efface from their minds all traces of the sins committed by them. This idea has been expressed in the last rendering. Thus a single small sentence has been so worded as to cover all the possible forms of forgiveness, from its lowest phase to its highest manifestation.
a
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
c
9:60, 103, 104.
342
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, open and secret. By giving alms openly a man sets a good example to others which they may imitate. Secret almsgiving in some cases is better, because then one refrains from exposing the poverty of his less fortunate brethren, and there is also little occasion for feeling proud in giving secretly.
343
The particle min either may have been used for the sake of emphasis, or in the sense of "many" or "some."
فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا فَاۡذَنُوۡا بِحَرۡبٍ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ وَرَسُوۡلِہٖ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُبۡتُمۡ فَلَکُمۡ رُءُوۡسُ اَمۡوٰلِکُمۡ لَا تَظۡلِمُوۡنَ وَلَا تُظۡلَمُوۡنَ
عربی میں رُءُ وْسُ اَمْوَالِکُمْ یعنی راس المال کا لفظ جمع ہے۔ مگر اردو میں یہ لفظ جمع استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے ترجمہ مفرد لفظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ لفظی ترجمہ ہوتا تو کہتے تمہارے وہ اموال جو تم نے قرض دئے ہوئے ہیں وہ تمہارے لئے ہیں۔
Important Words:
فاذنوا (then beware of) is derived from اذن. They say اذن له i.e. he gave ear or listened to it or him; he permitted, or allowed him. أذن بالشیء means, he knew the thing; or he became informed or apprised of it. آذنه بالامر means, he made him to know the thing; or he notified or announced it to him. أذن (adhdhana) or تأذن (ta’adhdhana) means, he made known or notified or announced (Lane).
حرب (war) is from حرب. They say حربه i.e. he despoiled him of his wealth and property, leaving him without anything. حرب (hariba) means, he became greatly angry, or wrathful. الحرب means, war; hostilities (Aqrab).
رؤس اموالکم (your original sums). رؤس is the plural of رأس meaning: (1) head; (2) the upper or higher part or end of a thing; (3) chief or leader of a society. رأس الشھر means, the first day of the month. The word رأس also signifies the thing itself; as they say ھوقسم برأسه i.e. this is an independent species in itself. رأس المال means, the original sum without interest; principal; capital. The Arabs say اقرضنی عشرة برؤسھا i.e. he lent me a loan of ten pieces of money without interest (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse declares that the taking of interest is tantamount to waging war against God. It may be inferred from this that those among Muslims who lend money at interest, should be boycotted by the rest of the community. History bears testimony to the fact that such Muslim States as borrowed or lent money at interest were ruined.
It is often objected that no trade or commerce is possible without interest. This is not correct. There is no natural relation between trade and interest. The latter has become unconsciously associated with the former, as Western countries have based their commercial system on credit. If this had not been so, commerce would not have been dependent upon interest. Only a few hundred years ago, Muslims were responsible for a large part of the world’s commerce, and yet they carried it on without interest. They used to borrow money even from the poorer classes by way of partnership loans, and the commerce carried on by them thus contributed directly to the welfare of those classes. Interest is not at all essential for commerce, but as commerce is now being carried on, on the basis of interest, it appears as if without interest it would come to a standstill. No doubt, a change in the system would at first be inconvenient but the system of commerce depending upon interest can certainly be discarded.
Interest is, in fact, a leech which is fast sucking away the blood of humanity, especially of the lower and middle classes. Even the upper classes are not entirely secure against its poison, but they are deriving a false enjoyment from it like the proverbial leopard who ate away his own tongue by rubbing it against a rough stone, foolishly thinking it to be the blood and flesh of another animal. Unfortunately those who are willing to forego it are too weak to withstand the force of the current system.
The system of credit prevailing in Western countries is destructive to the peace of the world in two ways. On the one hand, it helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and, on the other, it facilitates war. No government can be imagined as entering upon a great war unless it relies upon its ability to raise money by means of loans carrying interest. Long and devastating wars are made possible only by the institution of interest. If huge loans on interest were not possible, many countries would refuse to enter what appeared to be a long war; and if they entered such wars at all, they would certainly hasten to withdraw from them long before they actually terminated, for their treasuries would become empty and their people would revolt in protest against the criminal waste of men and money. But the system of what appear to be easy loans makes it possible for governments to carry on ruinous struggles as they are able to obtain the sinews of war without having to resort to a system of direct taxation. The people of belligerent countries do not, at the moment, feel the burden which is laid on their backs, but after the war is over their backs are bent double under the staggering weight of national debts and future generations are kept busy reducing the weight. Take, for instance, the case of the last Great War. If huge loans had not been possible, the result of the war would still have been the same, but the devastation and the heavy indebtedness of the different countries would have been avoided. Nay, the War itself might have been avoided; and even if it had taken place, the belligerents would soon have been exhausted, peace would have been signed within a year, and the world would have proceeded on its forward march of progress. A worse fate is perhaps awaiting the Western countries at the termination of the present World War.
1
عربی میں رُءُ وْسُ اَمْوَالِکُمْ یعنی راس المال کا لفظ جمع ہے۔ مگر اردو میں یہ لفظ جمع استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔ اس لئے ترجمہ مفرد لفظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ لفظی ترجمہ ہوتا تو کہتے تمہارے وہ اموال جو تم نے قرض دئے ہوئے ہیں وہ تمہارے لئے ہیں۔
286
Important Words:
فاذنوا (then beware of) is derived from اذن. They say اذن له i.e. he gave ear or listened to it or him; he permitted, or allowed him. أذن بالشیء means, he knew the thing; or he became informed or apprised of it. آذنه بالامر means, he made him to know the thing; or he notified or announced it to him. أذن (adhdhana) or تأذن (ta’adhdhana) means, he made known or notified or announced (Lane).
حرب (war) is from حرب. They say حربه i.e. he despoiled him of his wealth and property, leaving him without anything. حرب (hariba) means, he became greatly angry, or wrathful. الحرب means, war; hostilities (Aqrab).
رؤس اموالکم (your original sums). رؤس is the plural of رأس meaning: (1) head; (2) the upper or higher part or end of a thing; (3) chief or leader of a society. رأس الشھر means, the first day of the month. The word رأس also signifies the thing itself; as they say ھوقسم برأسه i.e. this is an independent species in itself. رأس المال means, the original sum without interest; principal; capital. The Arabs say اقرضنی عشرة برؤسھا i.e. he lent me a loan of ten pieces of money without interest (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse declares that the taking of interest is tantamount to waging war against God. It may be inferred from this that those among Muslims who lend money at interest, should be boycotted by the rest of the community. History bears testimony to the fact that such Muslim States as borrowed or lent money at interest were ruined.
It is often objected that no trade or commerce is possible without interest. This is not correct. There is no natural relation between trade and interest. The latter has become unconsciously associated with the former, as Western countries have based their commercial system on credit. If this had not been so, commerce would not have been dependent upon interest. Only a few hundred years ago, Muslims were responsible for a large part of the world’s commerce, and yet they carried it on without interest. They used to borrow money even from the poorer classes by way of partnership loans, and the commerce carried on by them thus contributed directly to the welfare of those classes. Interest is not at all essential for commerce, but as commerce is now being carried on, on the basis of interest, it appears as if without interest it would come to a standstill. No doubt, a change in the system would at first be inconvenient but the system of commerce depending upon interest can certainly be discarded.
Interest is, in fact, a leech which is fast sucking away the blood of humanity, especially of the lower and middle classes. Even the upper classes are not entirely secure against its poison, but they are deriving a false enjoyment from it like the proverbial leopard who ate away his own tongue by rubbing it against a rough stone, foolishly thinking it to be the blood and flesh of another animal. Unfortunately those who are willing to forego it are too weak to withstand the force of the current system.
The system of credit prevailing in Western countries is destructive to the peace of the world in two ways. On the one hand, it helps the accumulation of wealth in a few hands and, on the other, it facilitates war. No government can be imagined as entering upon a great war unless it relies upon its ability to raise money by means of loans carrying interest. Long and devastating wars are made possible only by the institution of interest. If huge loans on interest were not possible, many countries would refuse to enter what appeared to be a long war; and if they entered such wars at all, they would certainly hasten to withdraw from them long before they actually terminated, for their treasuries would become empty and their people would revolt in protest against the criminal waste of men and money. But the system of what appear to be easy loans makes it possible for governments to carry on ruinous struggles as they are able to obtain the sinews of war without having to resort to a system of direct taxation. The people of belligerent countries do not, at the moment, feel the burden which is laid on their backs, but after the war is over their backs are bent double under the staggering weight of national debts and future generations are kept busy reducing the weight. Take, for instance, the case of the last Great War. If huge loans had not been possible, the result of the war would still have been the same, but the devastation and the heavy indebtedness of the different countries would have been avoided. Nay, the War itself might have been avoided; and even if it had taken place, the belligerents would soon have been exhausted, peace would have been signed within a year, and the world would have proceeded on its forward march of progress. A worse fate is perhaps awaiting the Western countries at the termination of the present World War.
وَاِنۡ کَانَ ذُوۡ عُسۡرَۃٍ فَنَظِرَۃٌ اِلٰی مَیۡسَرَۃٍ ۚ وَاَنۡ تَصَدَّقُوۡا خَیۡرٌ لَّکُمۡ ۖ اِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ تَعۡلَمُوۡنَ
伊斯兰教竭力规劝贷款给人家, 但是贷款应当是无息而行善的。借款到期要还债时, 如果借债人觉得自己处境穷困, 要给他一段暂缓的时间, 直到他觉得自己较宽裕时才归还。
کَانَ دو قسم کا ہوتا ہے۔ تامہ بھی اور ناقصہ بھی۔ ناقصہ تو اسم اور خبر پر آتا ہے جیسے کَانَ الْبُسْتَانُ مُثْمِرًا باغ میں پھل لگے ہوئے ہیں اور تامہ وہ ہے جو مفرد فعل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور اس کے بعد کا اسم اس کا فاعل ہوتا ہے اس کے کئی معنے ہوتے ہیں مثلاً واقع ہوا‘ ثابت ہوا‘ موجود ہوا‘ حاضر ہوا۔ (اقرب) اس جگہ پر ’’حاضر ہوا‘‘ کے معنے ہیں اور کان تامہ ہے۔ مراد یہ ہے کہ اگر کوئی تنگ حال ہو کر کہے کہ میں تو یکدم قرض ادا نہیں کر سکتا تو خود راس المال کی وصولی میں بھی التوا کر دینا چاہیے۔
Islam urges the giving of loans but they should be beneficent loans, without interest. If the debtor finds himself in straitened circumstances when the time for the repayment of a loan arrives, he should be granted respite till he finds himself in easier circumstances.
Commentary:
The preceding verse enjoined the taking back of the original sums only. The present verse further exhorts the creditor to grant delay to a debtor in straitened circumstances.
Creditors are exhorted to deal kindly and beneficently with their brethren so that God may also (deal with them kindly. They should remember that if they have advanced loans to others, God has also advanced certain loans to them by conferring on them His numberless favours and bounties; and if they have a right to charge interest, God has also a right to make heavy demands from them, but He does not. And if He did, what would be the fate of man?
209
伊斯兰教竭力规劝贷款给人家, 但是贷款应当是无息而行善的。借款到期要还债时, 如果借债人觉得自己处境穷困, 要给他一段暂缓的时间, 直到他觉得自己较宽裕时才归还。
2
کَانَ دو قسم کا ہوتا ہے۔ تامہ بھی اور ناقصہ بھی۔ ناقصہ تو اسم اور خبر پر آتا ہے جیسے کَانَ الْبُسْتَانُ مُثْمِرًا باغ میں پھل لگے ہوئے ہیں اور تامہ وہ ہے جو مفرد فعل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور اس کے بعد کا اسم اس کا فاعل ہوتا ہے اس کے کئی معنے ہوتے ہیں مثلاً واقع ہوا‘ ثابت ہوا‘ موجود ہوا‘ حاضر ہوا۔ (اقرب) اس جگہ پر ’’حاضر ہوا‘‘ کے معنے ہیں اور کان تامہ ہے۔ مراد یہ ہے کہ اگر کوئی تنگ حال ہو کر کہے کہ میں تو یکدم قرض ادا نہیں کر سکتا تو خود راس المال کی وصولی میں بھی التوا کر دینا چاہیے۔
287
Commentary:
The preceding verse enjoined the taking back of the original sums only. The present verse further exhorts the creditor to grant delay to a debtor in straitened circumstances.
Creditors are exhorted to deal kindly and beneficently with their brethren so that God may also (deal with them kindly. They should remember that if they have advanced loans to others, God has also advanced certain loans to them by conferring on them His numberless favours and bounties; and if they have a right to charge interest, God has also a right to make heavy demands from them, but He does not. And if He did, what would be the fate of man?
353
Islam urges the giving of loans but they should be beneficent loans, without interest. If the debtor finds himself in straitened circumstances when the time for the repayment of a loan arrives, he should be granted respite till he finds himself in easier circumstances.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اِذَا تَدَایَنۡتُمۡ بِدَیۡنٍ اِلٰۤی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی فَاکۡتُبُوۡہُ ۚ وَلۡیَکۡتُبۡ بَّیۡنَکُمۡ کَاتِبٌۢ بِالۡعَدۡلِ ۚ وَلَا یَاۡبَ کَاتِبٌ اَنۡ یَّکۡتُبَ کَمَا عَلَّمَہُ اللّٰہُ ۚ فَلۡیَکۡتُبۡ وَلۡیُمۡلِلِ الَّذِیۡ عَلَیۡہِ الۡحَقُّ وَلۡیَتَّقِ اللّٰہَ رَبَّہٗ وَلَا یَبۡخَسۡ مِنۡہُ شَیۡـًٔا ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ الَّذِیۡ عَلَیۡہِ الۡحَقُّ سَفِیۡہًا اَوۡ ضَعِیۡفًا اَوۡ لَا یَسۡتَطِیۡعُ اَنۡ یُّمِلَّ ہُوَ فَلۡیُمۡلِلۡ وَلِیُّہٗ بِالۡعَدۡلِ ۚ وَاسۡتَشۡہِدُوۡا شَہِیۡدَیۡنِ مِنۡ رِّجَالِکُمۡ ۖ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُوۡنَا رَجُلَیۡنِ فَرَجُلٌ وَّامۡرَاَتَانِ مِمَّنۡ تَرۡضَوۡنَ مِنَ الشُّہَدَآءِ اَنۡ تَضِلَّ اِحۡدٰٮہُمَا فَتُذَکِّرَ اِحۡدٰٮہُمَا الۡاُخۡرٰی ۚ وَلَا یَاۡبَ الشُّہَدَآءُ اِذَا مَا دُعُوۡا ۚ وَلَا تَسۡـَٔمُوۡۤا اَنۡ تَکۡتُبُوۡہُ صَغِیۡرًا اَوۡ کَبِیۡرًا اِلٰۤی اَجَلِہٖ ۚ ذٰلِکُمۡ اَقۡسَطُ عِنۡدَ اللّٰہِ وَاَقۡوَمُ لِلشَّہٰدَۃِ وَاَدۡنٰۤی اَلَّا تَرۡتَابُوۡۤا ۖ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡ تَکُوۡنَ تِجٰرَۃً حَاضِرَۃً تُدِیۡرُوۡنَہَا بَیۡنَکُمۡ فَلَیۡسَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ جُنَاحٌ اَلَّا تَکۡتُبُوۡہَا ۗ وَاَشۡہِدُوۡۤا اِذَا تَبَایَعۡتُمۡ ۚ وَلَا یُضَآرَّ کَاتِبٌ وَّلَا شَہِیۡدٌ ۚ وَاِنۡ تَفۡعَلُوۡا فَاِنَّہٗ فُسُوۡقٌۢ بِکُمۡ ۗ وَاتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ ۖ وَیُعَلِّمُکُمُ اللّٰہُ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِکُلِّ شَیۡءٍ عَلِیۡمٌ
4:30.
96:5.
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
这里指的是大笔交易。
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
4:30.
96:5.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
This refers to big transactions.
96:5.
4:30.
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
210
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
211
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
212
这里指的是大笔交易。
1
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
2
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
3
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
4
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
5
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
6
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
a
96:5.
b
4:30.
289
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
354
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
354A
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
354B
This refers to big transactions.
۞ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ عَلٰی سَفَرٍ وَّلَمۡ تَجِدُوۡا کَاتِبًا فَرِہٰنٌ مَّقۡبُوۡضَۃٌ ۖ فَاِنۡ اَمِنَ بَعۡضُکُمۡ بَعۡضًا فَلۡیُؤَدِّ الَّذِی اؤۡتُمِنَ اَمٰنَتَہٗ وَلۡیَتَّقِ اللّٰہَ رَبَّہٗ ۗ وَلَا تَکۡتُمُوا الشَّہٰدَۃَ ۚ وَمَنۡ یَّکۡتُمۡہَا فَاِنَّہٗۤ اٰثِمٌ قَلۡبُہٗ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ عَلِیۡمٌ
2:141; 5:107.
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
2:141; 5:107.
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
b
2:141; 5:107.
213
贷款也可以抵押的方式进行,一方得到贷款而另一方得到作为与此相等的抵押品。这种实际交易方式的性质称为 اَمَانَة (Amanah), 即涉及双方的信托或押金。用一种抵押品来鉴定一笔贷款, 意思是说, 贷款必需小心公正地按约如数归还的同时, 作为抵押品的财产也要以同样精神归还原主。
a
2:141; 5:107.
290
Important Words:
رھان (pledge) is derived from رھن. They say رھن الشیء فلانا او عند فلان i.e. he deposited the thing with him or gave it in his possession as a pledge or security for a debt, etc. راھن is one who makes such a pledge and مرتھن is one who receives it. رھینand مرھون mean, the thing so pledged; the thing placed or kept in custody in lieu of a debt, etc. رھان which is the noun-infinitive from راھن and رھن (rahn) which is the noun-infinitive from رھن (rahana) mean, the act of pledging; also the thing pledged. رھان is also the plural of رھن (Aqrab & Lane).
امانة (trust) and اوتمن (is entrusted) and امن (entrusts) are all derived from the same root. امن means, he trusted or he entrusted. ائتمن فلانا علی کذا means, he trusted him with that; he deposited it with him as a trust. امانة means, the thing committed to the trust and care of a person; also honesty, faithfulness and trustworthiness (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If a scribe is not available, loans may be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of this loan. This form of practical transaction, the verse goes on to explain, will be in the nature of an امانة i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By classing a loan with a trust, it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and the same honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
The words, and conceal not testimony, either refer to the testimony of such witnesses as may be present at the time of the pledge, or it may refer to the testimony of the parties themselves. When no other witness is available, the parties are themselves treated as such and may be called upon to give a true account of the affairs on oath.
The expression, his heart is sinful, signifies that he who conceals testimony commits a sin which has not a temporary effect but vitiates the innermost recesses of his heart. Nay, it is a sign of the fact that his heart has already become vitiated.
a
2:141; 5:107.
355
Loans may also be advanced in the form of pledges, one party receiving the loan of money and the other the thing pledged in lieu of it. This form of practical transaction will be in the nature of an Amanah, i.e. a trust or deposit affecting both parties. By identifying a loan with a trust it is hinted that loans should be returned with the same care and honesty with which property deposited as a trust is returned on demand.
لِّلّٰہِ مَا فِی السَّمٰوٰتِ وَمَا فِی الۡاَرۡضِ ۗ وَاِنۡ تُبۡدُوۡا مَا فِیۡۤ اَنۡفُسِکُمۡ اَوۡ تُخۡفُوۡہُ یُحَاسِبۡکُمۡ بِہِ اللّٰہُ ۖ فَیَغۡفِرُ لِمَنۡ یَّشَآءُ وَیُعَذِّبُ مَنۡ یَّشَآءُ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَلٰی کُلِّ شَیۡءٍ قَدِیۡرٌ
21:48.
5:19, 41; 48:15.
بِهٖ (Bihi) 这个字的意思是: (a) 依靠或在…基础上; (b) 因为或由於; 这句的意思是, “ 安拉都将照它或由於它而向你们结算的,” 也就是说, 人类的思想或行动, 不论如何隐藏也不会不结算, 而且按安拉的意愿来惩罚或宽赦。
“安拉的意愿” 这一用语, 更确切地意指自然法则的存在 (7:157)。但对安拉而言, 他的意愿代表他的法则, 因此, «古兰经» 一直以这一用语来指出: (1) 安拉是宇宙的最高权威; (2) 他的意愿就是他的法则; 以及 (3) 他的意愿以公正而仁慈的形式出现, 因为他是所有完美无缺的常德的持有主 (17:111)。
تُخْفُوْہُ : میں نے تُخْفُوْہُ کا ترجمہ ’’چھپائے رکھو‘‘ کیا ہے تا ارادۂ فعل جو الفاظ قرآن سے مستنبط ہوتا ہے‘ واضح ہو جائے۔
21:48.
5:19, 41; 48:15.
The word bihi signifies; (a) by means of or on the basis of; (b) for or because of; and the clause would mean, "Allah will call you to account for it or because of it," i.e. no human thought or action will go unaccounted for, however hidden it may be, and that it will be punished or pardoned as Allah may will.
The expression, "the will or pleasure of God," rather denotes the existence of a natural law (7:157). But as in the case of Allah it is His Will which stands for His Law, therefore the Qur’an has used this expression to point out (1) that God is the final authority in the universe; and (2) that His Will is the Law, and (3) that His Will manifests itself in a just and benevolent manner, for He is the Possessor of perfect attributes (17:111).
21:48.
5:19, 41; 48:15.
Commentary:
In this and the following two verses, with which the present Surah concludes, the subject of تزکیة (tazkiyah) or purification has been dealt with as promised in the prayer of Abraham (2:130). By reminding us that to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and whatever is in the earth, the Quran teaches us that, since everything is God’s, we must avoid all those things which He requires us to avoid and adopt all those which He requires us to adopt. If we obey the commandments of God, which are meant for our own good, He will cause us to thrive and prosper, for He is the Controller of all causes and all effects.
The verse embodies the great secret of attaining purification. That secret is, that if you wish to become pure, you should begin with the root, i.e. you should make your hearts pure. Says the Holy Prophet: "In the body of man there is a piece of flesh; if this piece of flesh is sound, the whole body becomes sound; if it is corrupt, the whole body becomes corrupt. Behold! It is the heart" (Bukhari).
The particle با (for) in the Arabic clause rendered as, Allah will call you to account for it, means: (a) by means of or on the basis of; (b) for or because of. Following the first meaning, the verse would mean "Allah will call you to account by means of it or on the basis of it", i.e. your actions will be judged on the basis of that which is in your hearts. They will be weighed from the point of view of your motives. This is another way of saying, in the words of the Holy Prophet, انما الاعمال بالنیات i.e. Surely, the actions of men will be judged by the intention or the motive with which they are performed (Bukhari). Following the second meaning of it, the verse would mean, "Allah will call you to account for it or because of it", i.e. no human thought will be lost, however hidden it may be and that it will be requited or pardoned as Allah may will it.
In connection with the words, whether you keep it hidden, it should be remembered that God will not call man to account for passing or momentary thoughts that sometimes cross his mind, for they are beyond one’s control. In 2:287 we read, "Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity", and it is certainly beyond our "capacity" to check the fleeting thoughts that occasionally flash across our minds. It is only the evil thoughts that we cherish and harbour in our minds, such as malice, envy, etc., and we shall be called to account for only the evil designs that we knowingly evolve and contemplate. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that God has commanded the angels saying: "If a servant of mine thinks of doing an evil deed, do not write it down against him; but if he carries out his intention, then write it down. And if he intends to do a good deed, but abstains from doing it, write it down as one good act; and if he actually does a good deed then let it be noted as ten acts of virtue" (Tirmidhi).
The expression, whomsoever He pleases, does not mean that God acts, as it were, arbitrarily without law or purpose. In the Quranic idiom the expression, "the will or pleasure of God," rather denotes the existence of a natural law (7:157). But as in the case of Allah it is His will which stands for His Law, therefore the Quran uses this expression to point out that (1) God is the final authority in the universe; and that (2) His will is the law; and that (3) His will manifests itself in a just and benevolent manner, for He is the possessor of perfect attributes (17:111).
a
21:48.
b
5:19, 41; 48:15.
214
بِهٖ (Bihi) 这个字的意思是: (a) 依靠或在…基础上; (b) 因为或由於; 这句的意思是, “ 安拉都将照它或由於它而向你们结算的,” 也就是说, 人类的思想或行动, 不论如何隐藏也不会不结算, 而且按安拉的意愿来惩罚或宽赦。
215
“安拉的意愿” 这一用语, 更确切地意指自然法则的存在 (7:157)。但对安拉而言, 他的意愿代表他的法则, 因此, «古兰经» 一直以这一用语来指出: (1) 安拉是宇宙的最高权威; (2) 他的意愿就是他的法则; 以及 (3) 他的意愿以公正而仁慈的形式出现, 因为他是所有完美无缺的常德的持有主 (17:111)。
1
تُخْفُوْہُ : میں نے تُخْفُوْہُ کا ترجمہ ’’چھپائے رکھو‘‘ کیا ہے تا ارادۂ فعل جو الفاظ قرآن سے مستنبط ہوتا ہے‘ واضح ہو جائے۔
a
21:48.
b
5:19, 41; 48:15.
291
Commentary:
In this and the following two verses, with which the present Surah concludes, the subject of تزکیة (tazkiyah) or purification has been dealt with as promised in the prayer of Abraham (2:130). By reminding us that to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and whatever is in the earth, the Quran teaches us that, since everything is God’s, we must avoid all those things which He requires us to avoid and adopt all those which He requires us to adopt. If we obey the commandments of God, which are meant for our own good, He will cause us to thrive and prosper, for He is the Controller of all causes and all effects.
The verse embodies the great secret of attaining purification. That secret is, that if you wish to become pure, you should begin with the root, i.e. you should make your hearts pure. Says the Holy Prophet: "In the body of man there is a piece of flesh; if this piece of flesh is sound, the whole body becomes sound; if it is corrupt, the whole body becomes corrupt. Behold! It is the heart" (Bukhari).
The particle با (for) in the Arabic clause rendered as, Allah will call you to account for it, means: (a) by means of or on the basis of; (b) for or because of. Following the first meaning, the verse would mean "Allah will call you to account by means of it or on the basis of it", i.e. your actions will be judged on the basis of that which is in your hearts. They will be weighed from the point of view of your motives. This is another way of saying, in the words of the Holy Prophet, انما الاعمال بالنیات i.e. Surely, the actions of men will be judged by the intention or the motive with which they are performed (Bukhari). Following the second meaning of it, the verse would mean, "Allah will call you to account for it or because of it", i.e. no human thought will be lost, however hidden it may be and that it will be requited or pardoned as Allah may will it.
In connection with the words, whether you keep it hidden, it should be remembered that God will not call man to account for passing or momentary thoughts that sometimes cross his mind, for they are beyond one’s control. In 2:287 we read, "Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity", and it is certainly beyond our "capacity" to check the fleeting thoughts that occasionally flash across our minds. It is only the evil thoughts that we cherish and harbour in our minds, such as malice, envy, etc., and we shall be called to account for only the evil designs that we knowingly evolve and contemplate. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said that God has commanded the angels saying: "If a servant of mine thinks of doing an evil deed, do not write it down against him; but if he carries out his intention, then write it down. And if he intends to do a good deed, but abstains from doing it, write it down as one good act; and if he actually does a good deed then let it be noted as ten acts of virtue" (Tirmidhi).
The expression, whomsoever He pleases, does not mean that God acts, as it were, arbitrarily without law or purpose. In the Quranic idiom the expression, "the will or pleasure of God," rather denotes the existence of a natural law (7:157). But as in the case of Allah it is His will which stands for His Law, therefore the Quran uses this expression to point out that (1) God is the final authority in the universe; and that (2) His will is the law; and that (3) His will manifests itself in a just and benevolent manner, for He is the possessor of perfect attributes (17:111).
b
21:48.
c
5:19, 41; 48:15.
356
The word bihi signifies; (a) by means of or on the basis of; (b) for or because of; and the clause would mean, "Allah will call you to account for it or because of it," i.e. no human thought or action will go unaccounted for, however hidden it may be, and that it will be punished or pardoned as Allah may will.
357
The expression, "the will or pleasure of God," rather denotes the existence of a natural law (7:157). But as in the case of Allah it is His Will which stands for His Law, therefore the Qur’an has used this expression to point out (1) that God is the final authority in the universe; and (2) that His Will is the Law, and (3) that His Will manifests itself in a just and benevolent manner, for He is the Possessor of perfect attributes (17:111).
اِنۡ تَمۡسَسۡکُمۡ حَسَنَۃٌ تَسُؤۡہُمۡ وَاِنۡ تُصِبۡکُمۡ سَیِّئَۃٌ یَّفۡرَحُوۡا بِہَا ۖ وَاِنۡ تَصۡبِرُوۡا وَتَتَّقُوۡا لَا یَضُرُّکُمۡ کَیۡدُہُمۡ شَیۡـًٔا ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ بِمَا یَعۡمَلُوۡنَ مُحِیۡطٌ
9:50.
اَحَاطَ کے معنے بالکل تباہ کر دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ (اقرب)
9:50.
God will bring to naught all their doings and will destroy them. Muslims should not therefore fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, and He will frustrate them.
9:50.
Commentary:
The enemies of Islam, both open and secret, are grieved to see the success of believers and try to minimize it. But when Muslims meet with some failure, they rejoice and try to exaggerate it. Their object is to dishearten and discourage believers.
The words, Allah encompasses their deeds, signify that God will bring to nought all their doings and destroy them. Muslims should not, therefore, fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, Who will frustrate them.
d
9:50.
1
اَحَاطَ کے معنے بالکل تباہ کر دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ (اقرب)
b
9:50.
405
Commentary:
The enemies of Islam, both open and secret, are grieved to see the success of believers and try to minimize it. But when Muslims meet with some failure, they rejoice and try to exaggerate it. Their object is to dishearten and discourage believers.
The words, Allah encompasses their deeds, signify that God will bring to nought all their doings and destroy them. Muslims should not, therefore, fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, Who will frustrate them.
a
9:50.
466
God will bring to naught all their doings and will destroy them. Muslims should not therefore fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, and He will frustrate them.
اِنۡ یَّنۡصُرۡکُمُ اللّٰہُ فَلَا غَالِبَ لَکُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ یَّخۡذُلۡکُمۡ فَمَنۡ ذَا الَّذِیۡ یَنۡصُرُکُمۡ مِّنۡۢ بَعۡدِہٖ ۗ وَعَلَی اللّٰہِ فَلۡیَتَوَکَّلِ الۡمُؤۡمِنُوۡنَ
The expression, Min Ba‘dihi, translated as, "beside Him," literally means, "after Him" and may be rendered as "in opposition to Him."
Commentary:
The words من بعدہ translated as, beside Him, literally mean "after Him" and may also be rendered as "in opposition to Him". The verse throws further light on the philosophy of توکل (trust in God). In spite of making use of the necessary means, a true believer should, and in fact does, put his trust in God alone.
443
Commentary:
The words من بعدہ translated as, beside Him, literally mean "after Him" and may also be rendered as "in opposition to Him". The verse throws further light on the philosophy of توکل (trust in God). In spite of making use of the necessary means, a true believer should, and in fact does, put his trust in God alone.
516
The expression, Min Ba‘dihi, translated as, "beside Him," literally means, "after Him" and may be rendered as "in opposition to Him."
لَقَدۡ مَنَّ اللّٰہُ عَلَی الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ اِذۡ بَعَثَ فِیۡہِمۡ رَسُوۡلًا مِّنۡ اَنۡفُسِہِمۡ یَتۡلُوۡا عَلَیۡہِمۡ اٰیٰتِہٖ وَیُزَکِّیۡہِمۡ وَیُعَلِّمُہُمُ الۡکِتٰبَ وَالۡحِکۡمَۃَ وَاِنۡ کَانُوۡا مِنۡ قَبۡلُ لَفِیۡ ضَلٰلٍ مُّبِیۡنٍ
2:130, 152; 9:128; 63:3; 65:12.
The words are intended to awaken in the hearts of Muslims a desire to follow the example of the Holy Prophet, who was like them and was one of them.
2:130, 152; 9:128; 62:3; 65:12.
Commentary:
The expression, by raising among them a Messenger from among themselves, is intended to awaken in the hearts of Muslims a desire to follow the example of the Holy Prophet, who was like them and one of them. The Prophet was not only a man like them but was actually one of them. If he could rise to such spiritual heights, why could not they?
All Messengers of God are raised from among human beings and they possess the same faculties and are actuated by the same desires and aspirations as other human beings, and, therefore, they can serve as true models for their fellow beings. But a so-called "Son of God" does not possess the same desires and the same faculties as we have, and cannot, therefore, be a model for us. Our model should be from our own kind. He who is not of our kind, being a divine being, free from human passions and human weaknesses, cannot be held out to us as a model for imitation.
The verse also points to the fulfilment of the prayer of Abraham contained in 2:130, in which the different functions of the Promised Prophet have been mentioned just as they are mentioned here.
a
2:130, 152; 9:128; 63:3; 65:12.
289
这句话的意思是唤醒穆斯林心中以穆圣为模范的愿望, 而穆圣和他们一样, 也是他们中的一员。
a
2:130, 152; 9:128; 62:3; 65:12.
447
Commentary:
The expression, by raising among them a Messenger from among themselves, is intended to awaken in the hearts of Muslims a desire to follow the example of the Holy Prophet, who was like them and one of them. The Prophet was not only a man like them but was actually one of them. If he could rise to such spiritual heights, why could not they?
All Messengers of God are raised from among human beings and they possess the same faculties and are actuated by the same desires and aspirations as other human beings, and, therefore, they can serve as true models for their fellow beings. But a so-called "Son of God" does not possess the same desires and the same faculties as we have, and cannot, therefore, be a model for us. Our model should be from our own kind. He who is not of our kind, being a divine being, free from human passions and human weaknesses, cannot be held out to us as a model for imitation.
The verse also points to the fulfilment of the prayer of Abraham contained in 2:130, in which the different functions of the Promised Prophet have been mentioned just as they are mentioned here.
a
2:130, 152; 9:128; 63:3; 65:12.
520
The words are intended to awaken in the hearts of Muslims a desire to follow the example of the Holy Prophet, who was like them and was one of them.
مَّا کَانَ اللّٰہُ لِیَذَرَ الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ عَلٰی مَاۤ اَنۡتُمۡ عَلَیۡہِ حَتّٰی یَمِیۡزَ الۡخَبِیۡثَ مِنَ الطَّیِّبِ ۗ وَمَا کَانَ اللّٰہُ لِیُطۡلِعَکُمۡ عَلَی الۡغَیۡبِ وَلٰکِنَّ اللّٰہَ یَجۡتَبِیۡ مِنۡ رُّسُلِہٖ مَنۡ یَّشَآءُ ۖ فَاٰمِنُوۡا بِاللّٰہِ وَرُسُلِہٖ ۚ وَاِنۡ تُؤۡمِنُوۡا وَتَتَّقُوۡا فَلَکُمۡ اَجۡرٌ عَظِیۡمٌ
8:38; 29:3-4.
72:27-28.
The verse signifies that the trials and tribulations through which Muslims have so far passed would not end soon. There are yet many more in store for them, and they will continue to come till true believers are completely distinguished from hypocrites and those weak of faith.
The words do not mean that some of the Messengers are chosen and others are not. They mean that of the persons whom God ordains as His Messengers, He chooses the one most suited for the particular age in which he is raised.
8:38; 29:3-4.
72:27-28.
Important Words:
لیطلعکم (would reveal to you). یطلع is derived from طلع, which means, he appeared; he rose; he ascended. اطلعه علیه means, he revealed it to him or he made him acquainted with it; or lifted him high up so that he might have a clear view of it. The expression لیطلعکم علی الغیب therefore, would mean, that He should cause you to ascend the unseen; or lift you high up to have a clear view of the unseen, i.e. cause you to obtain mastery of the unseen; or in other words, reveal to you the secrets of the unseen in abundance. Elsewhere the Quran says لایظھر علی غیبه احدا God discloses not the unseen to anyone in abundance (72:27). Here, too, the word used, i.e. یظھر points to mastery of a thing or having a thing in abundance.
Commentary:
The sentence, Allah would not leave the believers as you are, signifies that the trials and tribulations through which Muslims have so far passed would not soon end. There are yet many more in store for them, and they will continue to come till true believers are distinguished from hypocrites and those weak of faith.
The expression, Allah chooses of His Messengers whom He pleases, does not mean that some of the Messengers are chosen and others not, but that of the persons whom He has ordained to be sent as His Messengers, He chooses the one suited for the particular age in which he is sent. Or the particle من (of) may be taken to give the sense of intensification or emphasis without restricting the sense to a specified section of the class. In that case the sentence will read as, Allah does choose as His Messengers whom He pleases. It must be remembered that all Messengers are raised under a special divine decree.
When it was stated that God intended to separate the wicked from the good by revealing His will to His Messengers, the question was asked by disbelievers, why did not God reveal Himself to them? To this question God has given the answer that He reveals His will only to His Messengers and the Elect. All are not pure or ennobled enough to receive His revelation.
a
72:27-28.
e
8:38; 29:3-4.
293
此节经文的意思是穆斯林迄今所经历的苦难和磨炼不会很快结束, 还有许多苦难和磨炼要落到他们身上, 它们 (磨难) 将继续到完全辨别出真正的信者和伪信者以及那些信念淡薄的人为止。
294
这句话的意思不是选择某些使者, 不选择其他使者。它们的意思是: 在安拉任命为他的使者的人中, 他选择一个最适合在某一时代的人。
a
8:38; 29:3-4.
b
72:27-28.
462
Important Words:
لیطلعکم (would reveal to you). یطلع is derived from طلع, which means, he appeared; he rose; he ascended. اطلعه علیه means, he revealed it to him or he made him acquainted with it; or lifted him high up so that he might have a clear view of it. The expression لیطلعکم علی الغیب therefore, would mean, that He should cause you to ascend the unseen; or lift you high up to have a clear view of the unseen, i.e. cause you to obtain mastery of the unseen; or in other words, reveal to you the secrets of the unseen in abundance. Elsewhere the Quran says لایظھر علی غیبه احدا God discloses not the unseen to anyone in abundance (72:27). Here, too, the word used, i.e. یظھر points to mastery of a thing or having a thing in abundance.
Commentary:
The sentence, Allah would not leave the believers as you are, signifies that the trials and tribulations through which Muslims have so far passed would not soon end. There are yet many more in store for them, and they will continue to come till true believers are distinguished from hypocrites and those weak of faith.
The expression, Allah chooses of His Messengers whom He pleases, does not mean that some of the Messengers are chosen and others not, but that of the persons whom He has ordained to be sent as His Messengers, He chooses the one suited for the particular age in which he is sent. Or the particle من (of) may be taken to give the sense of intensification or emphasis without restricting the sense to a specified section of the class. In that case the sentence will read as, Allah does choose as His Messengers whom He pleases. It must be remembered that all Messengers are raised under a special divine decree.
When it was stated that God intended to separate the wicked from the good by revealing His will to His Messengers, the question was asked by disbelievers, why did not God reveal Himself to them? To this question God has given the answer that He reveals His will only to His Messengers and the Elect. All are not pure or ennobled enough to receive His revelation.
b
8:38; 29:3-4.
c
72:27-28.
535
The verse signifies that the trials and tribulations through which Muslims have so far passed would not end soon. There are yet many more in store for them, and they will continue to come till true believers are completely distinguished from hypocrites and those weak of faith.
536
The words do not mean that some of the Messengers are chosen and others are not. They mean that of the persons whom God ordains as His Messengers, He chooses the one most suited for the particular age in which he is raised.
۞ لَتُبۡلَوُنَّ فِیۡۤ اَمۡوٰلِکُمۡ وَاَنۡفُسِکُمۡ وَلَتَسۡمَعُنَّ مِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوا الۡکِتٰبَ مِنۡ قَبۡلِکُمۡ وَمِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ اَشۡرَکُوۡۤا اَذًی کَثِیۡرًا ۚ وَاِنۡ تَصۡبِرُوۡا وَتَتَّقُوۡا فَاِنَّ ذٰلِکَ مِنۡ عَزۡمِ الۡاُمُوۡرِ
2:156; 8:29; 64:16.
5:83.
Tests and trials serve a fourfold purpose: (1) They distinguish the waverers and the weak of faith from the sincere and steadfast votaries. (2) They are a means of spiritual advancement for those sincere in faith. (3) Those going through a trial come to know the strength or weakness of their own faith and are thus enabled to shape their conduct accordingly. (4) Trials also establish the title to reward of those deserving it.
2:156; 8:29; 64:16.
5:83.
Commentary:
Tests and trials are necessary and serve a four-fold purpose: (1) They distinguish the waverers and the weak of faith from those sincere and steadfast votaries whose faith is strong and firm. (2) They become a means of spiritual advancement for those sincere in faith. (3) Those who are tried come to know of the strength or otherwise of their own faith and are thus enabled to shape their conduct accordingly. (4) Trials also establish the title to reward of those deserving it.
Indeed there never was a Prophet who, along with his followers, was not called upon to put up with abuse and hardships.
e
2:156; 8:29; 64:16.
f
5:83.
299
考验和磨难有四重作用: (1) 它们分清动摇者、信念淡薄者和真诚、坚定的信者。(2) 它们是那些信仰真诚者的精神进步的一种手段。(3) 那些经历磨难的人逐渐明白自己的信念是坚强还是淡薄, 从而能够相应调整他们的行动。(4) 磨炼也能确定那些应受到报应者的资格。
c
2:156; 8:29; 64:16.
d
5:83.
469
Commentary:
Tests and trials are necessary and serve a four-fold purpose: (1) They distinguish the waverers and the weak of faith from those sincere and steadfast votaries whose faith is strong and firm. (2) They become a means of spiritual advancement for those sincere in faith. (3) Those who are tried come to know of the strength or otherwise of their own faith and are thus enabled to shape their conduct accordingly. (4) Trials also establish the title to reward of those deserving it.
Indeed there never was a Prophet who, along with his followers, was not called upon to put up with abuse and hardships.
a
2:156; 8:29; 64:16.
b
5:83.
543
Tests and trials serve a fourfold purpose: (1) They distinguish the waverers and the weak of faith from the sincere and steadfast votaries. (2) They are a means of spiritual advancement for those sincere in faith. (3) Those going through a trial come to know the strength or weakness of their own faith and are thus enabled to shape their conduct accordingly. (4) Trials also establish the title to reward of those deserving it.
وَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ اَلَّا تُقۡسِطُوۡا فِی الۡیَتٰمٰی فَانۡکِحُوۡا مَا طَابَ لَکُمۡ مِّنَ النِّسَآءِ مَثۡنٰی وَثُلٰثَ وَرُبٰعَ ۖ فَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ اَلَّا تَعۡدِلُوۡا فَوٰحِدَۃً اَوۡ مَا مَلَکَتۡ اَیۡمٰنُکُمۡ ۚ ذٰلِکَ اَدۡنٰۤی اَلَّا تَعُوۡلُوا
4:130.
此节经文很重要。因为在一定条件下, 这儿允许一夫多妻。伊斯兰教允许 (虽然它肯定不会命令和鼓励) 一个男于同时可娶一至四个妻子。因为给予这种许可是与孤儿问题有关的, 所以应该在关心那个备受忽视的社会阶层的问题的基础上看待这种许可。在某些情况下, 只有按照环境的迫切需要从受监护的女性孤儿或其他女子中娶一个或超过一个妻子, 孤儿的权利才能得到保护。虽然这节经文所提到的一夫多妻与孤儿问题有关, 但是这种婚姻也可能由其它情况而引起, 如通过这种婚姻来纠正一些社会和道德上的弊病。如果只考虑这种婚姻本身的目的, 同意这种婚姻不仅是无可非议的, 而且在某种情况下, 是可取的, 甚至是十分必要的。在这种情况下, 不利用这种婚姻制度对个人与社会的利益, 无疑是有害的。根据 «古兰经», 婚姻的目的有四点: (1) 防止身体上、精神上以及道德上的疾病; (2:188; 4:25); (2) 安定精神, 得到爱侣 (30:22); (3) 生育子女; (4) 扩大亲戚的范围 (4:2)。有时候, 娶一个妻子就不能实现一个或全部上述婚姻目的。例如, 一个人的妻子永久病残, 或患上传染病时, 如果他不另娶妻子, 那么, 婚姻的目的就要受挫。实际上他毫无办法, 要么, 另订合法婚约, 要么, 因未能幸运地阻止情欲的侵袭而过着不道德的生活。一个患病的妻子也成不了幸福的伴侣, 因为不论她给丈夫如何有价值的关怀和同情, 但是她与她的丈夫在一起不能在各方面去安定丈夫的精神。同样, 如果妻子碰巧不能生育, 又没有一夫多妻制, 那么, 丈夫子嗣名留的这一完全正常自然要求就不能实现。正是为了满足这种迫切的需要, 伊斯兰教允许一夫多妻制度。如果出于上述任何一个情况, 丈夫与其第一个妻子离婚, 这是对他的一种耻辱。事实上, 一夫多妻的婚姻目的在某种程度上与一夫一妻婚姻目的是一样的。在一夫一妻制婚姻不能实现其中的一个或所有目的时, 一夫多妻婚姻就十分必要了。而且, 尽管他已有一个深深地爱着的妻子, 并也已达到了婚姻目的。但也有其他一些理由使某男子必须另娶一个或多个妻子, 那些理由是: (a) 保护孤儿; (b) 使可以结婚的寡妇得到丈夫; (c) 为缺少男子的家庭或社团增补男子。从注释的这节经文中, 我们清楚地看到, 采取一夫多妻制特别是为了将未受人保护的孤儿置于某人的保护之下。此节经文的含意是: 像这些需要受人保护的孤儿的母亲最好与保护人结婚, 这祥, 那保护人与这些孤儿的关系就更加直接与亲密, 比在其他情况下更关心他们的福利, 使寡妇们能得到丈夫 (24:33) 是制定一夫多妻制的另一个目的。在穆圣时代, 穆斯林迫于长期的战争。许多人在战争中死去, 留下了没有近亲照顾的寡妇和孤儿。妇女在数量上大为超过男子以及人数非常多的无人照顾的孤儿--------这是战争不可避免的结果--------鼓励一夫多妻以防止穆斯林社会的道德堕落。最近的两次世界大战证明伊斯兰教的这种婚姻制度是有用的。大战撇下了数量非常众多没有丈夫的年轻妇女。确实, 由于两次大战造成男子惊人的死亡, 使西方国家的妇女人数大大超过了男子, 这是目前西方社会道德败坏的原因, 它正在腐蚀西方社会的机体。除了使年轻的寡妇能得到丈夫外, 一夫多妻制的目的还在于应付战后发生的严重形势。战后除了各方面都在衰退外, 国家的男子人数急剧减少到使国家有可能灭亡的危险。人口出生率下降是民族衰亡的重要原因, 只有一夫多妻制能有效地改善这种情况。这种婚姻制度并非如人们所误解的那样, 是为了情欲的发泄。它的本质是需要男子和妇女作出牺牲, 这种牺牲要求个人的一时感情服从社会和国家的更大的利益。
مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语的一般意义是女战俘。她们没有被赎出, 被俘后在穆斯林的拘留和看管之下。因为她们参加战争想摧毁伊斯兰教, 因此理应剥夺她们的自由。在 «古兰经» 中用这一名称, 而不大用 عِبَادْ (‘Ibad, 奴隶) 和 اِمَاء (Ima’, 女奴隶), 为的要指出这种占有是公正和合法的。مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin) 的意思是 “完全和正义的占有” (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。它包括奴隶和女奴隶两种意思。究竟在句中这一用语用在特定的地方意指什么, 须视上下文而定。关于 “他们自己所掌握的” 一语, 有许多误解: 这句话什么意思, 他们自己所掌握的人有什么权利和地位。伊斯兰教毫不含糊地谴责奴隶制。因此, 剥夺一个人 (他或她) 的自由是一种道德上的罪过。除非他或她参加战争来摧毁伊斯兰教或一个伊斯兰国家, 当然要剥夺他们的自由。买卖奴隶也是一种很严重的罪过。伊斯兰教的教导在这点上是十分清楚、毫不含糊和反复强调的, 按照这一教导, 假如有人使另一个人做他的奴隶, 他就对安拉和人类犯了严重的罪行 {الْبَيْع بُخارِی، كِتَابُ--------Bukhari, Kitabul-Bai‘ & دَاؤُد--------Da’ud, 由 فَتْحُ الْبَارِی--------Fathul-Bari摘录}。值得注意的是, 伊斯兰教在世界上开始建立的时候, 奴隶制是人类
*社会制度中的一个组成部分, 每个国家都有大量的奴隶。因此, 把一种已经紧密交织在整个人类社会组织之中的制度一下子抹掉而不严重伤害它的道德风气, 这是行不通, 甚至是不明智的。因此, 伊斯兰教力求逐渐地但有效而坚定地废除奴隶制。«古兰经» 制订了以下几条有效的法规以迅速而完善的废除奴隶制: (1) 只能在正规战以后抓战俘; (2) 在战争结束后不能扣留战俘不放, 但是 (3) 作为一种恩惠的表示, 或者可以用交换战俘的方式来释放战俘 (47:5)。但是, 那些由于不适合以上那些条例而得不到自由的不幸的人们, 或者应该留在他们的穆斯林主人那里的人, 可以和他们的主人书写一个赎身合同 (24:34)。这样的话, 如果一个女人在上述性质的情况下作了战俘, 丧失了自由, 成为 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin), 她不能在交换战俘中获释, 政府的困境也不许可其以恩惠的表示而立即释放她, 她的政府或人们也不来赎买她, 她也不寻求和主人书立合同来买她的自由, 那么, 为
了道德起见, 他的主人在没有她事先同意的情况下娶了她, 有什么可以反对或有意见的呢? 至于没有和一个女战俘或奴隶结婚而发生性关系, 这在 «古兰经» 任何一节经文中也没有说过可以这么做。«古兰经» 不仅认为没有正式结婚是不可以把女战俘当妻子对待, 而且有清楚而确定的命令, 这些战俘像自由的妇女一样, 必须结了婚才能作为妻子。其中惟一的区别是社会地位的暂时的差别。由于她们参加反对伊斯兰教的战争而丧失了婚前同意的权利, 因此和她们结婚不必考虑像对自由妇女那样去徵求她们事先的同意。因此 مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语意指女战俘。按照 «古兰经», 无论如何也不会支持这样的看法, 说伊斯兰教批准非法同居。除了这节经文外, 至少还有其它四节经文以清楚而明确的条文制定了女战俘不应常处于不结婚状态中 (2:222; 4:4; 4:26; 24:33)。穆圣在这点也是态度非常鲜明的, 据记载他曾经说过, “如果某一个人有一个年幼的女奴隶, 他给她以正当的教育, 并用适当方式把她扶养成人, 然后解放并娶她为妻, 对他来说, 这是双重的报答” (الْعِلْم بُخَارِی، كِتَابُ Bukhari, Kitabul-‘Ilm)。穆圣这一说法的意思是, 如果一个穆斯林想要娶女奴隶为妻, 他必须先解放她, 然后娶她。穆圣自己的做法与这一训律十分符合。他的两个妻子朱伟里亚 (جُوَيْرِيَة, Juwairiyah) 和萨菲亚 (صَفِيَّة, Safiyyah) 就是作为战俘而来到他那里的。她们是他的 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin)。但他按照伊斯兰教的律令娶了她们。他也娶了 مَارِيَة (Mariyah), 她是埃及国王送给他的, 她享有像穆圣其他妻子那样的自由的地位。她戴上头盖, 并也被视为 “穆民之母”。«古兰经» 说得很清楚, 有关婚姻的律令适用于 “你们自己所掌握的 (奴婢)” 就像适用于 “穆圣姑父母、舅父母和姨父母的女儿” 那样。她们两个人都是结婚后才作为妻子的。以上所说的三类妇女都是通过结婚对穆圣才是合法的 (33:51)。还有, “禁止你们娶已婚的妇女, 除非你们具有所有权的,” (4:25) 这节经文连同上一节经文都述及到, 如果一个男人娶这种女人 (其中包括已婚的女人), 那是不合法的。但这里有个例外, 在宗教战争中被俘的那些已婚妇女宁愿留在穆斯林那里, 是可以同她们的主人结婚的。她们不愿回到以前丈夫那里去的这一事实被认为等于解除了她们过去的婚约。
这方面, 顺便还有一点值得注意, 不准许同一个女奴隶在禁止范围内的这样一些女亲属 (相应于一个自由妇女的那些亲属) 结婚。例如: 奴隶妻子的母亲、姐妹、女儿等是不能结婚的。要进一步讲清楚的是, 由于启示那个时候的环境, «古兰经» 必须区别两种妇女的社会地位。那种区别用 زَوْج (Zauj, 娶自由的妇女) 和 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin, 娶奴隶奴女) 等词来表达。前者意味着夫妻间是平等的, 而后者意味着妻子的地位要差一些。不过, 那是暂时的。«古兰经» 和穆圣极力劝告, 必须先给女奴隶完全的自由和地位, 然后娶她们。穆圣就是这样做的。此外, 伊斯兰教不准许在一般战争中俘虏妇女作为奴隶。未徵得一个女奴隶的事先同意而和她结婚, 只是在以下的情况下才可以: 敌对国先发动反对伊斯兰教的宗教战争, 想消灭伊斯兰教, 并在剑尖下强迫穆斯林放弃他们的宗教, 然后把他们的俘虏--------男的或女的--------作为奴隶对待, 就像在穆圣时代他们做的那样。那时, 敌人抓去穆斯林妇女作为俘虏并把他们当作奴隶看待。伊斯兰教的命令只是一种报复措施, 就其真实的性质来说, 它的时间是短暂的。它也具有保护被俘妇女德行的意义。现在那些条件已不复存在。现在没有宗教战争, 因此没有战俘被当作奴隶或女奴看待。
یعنی یتیم عورتوں سے ایک سے زیادہ شادیاں کرنی اچھی نہیں۔ کیونکہ بے انصافی کا ڈر ہے۔ ہاں ان کے سوا دوسری عورتوں سے دو دو‘ تین تین‘ چار چار سے نکاح کر سکتے ہو کیونکہ ان کے ولی ان کے حقوق کا مطالبہ کرنے والے موجود ہیں۔
یعنی اس طریق پر عمل کرکے تم ظلم اور گناہ کے خطرہ سے بہت حد تک محفوظ ہو جاؤ گے۔
4:130.
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under certain circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin or encourage) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As this permission has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken primarily to be based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can only be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may arise when it may become a necessary remedy for some social or moral evils. If only the objects of marriage itself are considered, the permission appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the com
The expression, Ma Malakat Aimanukum, generally signifies, women prisoners of war who are not ransomed and who are in the custody and control of their Muslim captors because they had taken part in a war which was waged to destroy Islam and thus had legitimately deprived themselves of their freedom. The term has been used in the Qur’an in preference to ‘Ibad and Ima’ (slaves and bondwomen) to point to a just and rightful possession, the expression Milku Yamin signifying full and rightful possession (Lisan). It includes both slaves and bondwomen, and it is only the context which determines what the expression signifies in a particular place. Much misunderstanding prevails as to what the expression "their right hands possess" signifies, and what are the rights and status of the persons to whom it applies. Islam has condemned slavery in unequivocal terms. According to it, it is a mortal sin to deprive a person of his or her liberty, unless, of course, he or she renders himself
Ta‘ulu (do injustice) is derived from ‘Ala which means; (1) he had a large family; (2) he supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted wrongfully; or deviated from the right course (Lane).
4:130.
Important Words:
طاب (as may be agreeable). طاب الشیء means, the thing was or became pleasing, delightful, agreeable or delicious. طابت به نفسی means, my mind or my soul became pleased and satisfied with it. طاب العیش لفلان means, life became pleasant and free from cares for such a one. طاب عن الشیء نفسا means, he willingly parted with the thing (Aqrab & Lane).
مثنی (two) is derived from ثنی. They say ثناہ i.e. he doubled it or folded it; or he turned one part of it upon another. ثنیsignifies the repetition of a thing, doing it one time after another, or a thing or affair done twice. مثنی means اثنان اثنان i.e. two and two; two and two together; or two at a time and two at a time. Similarly, ثلاث means, three and three; three and three together; or three at a time and three at a time; and so is the meaning of رباع (Lane & Aqrab). The expression مثنی و ثلاث و رباع would thus mean, two at a time, or three at a time, or four at a time.
تعولوا (do injustice) is derived from عال which means:(1) he had a family or a large family; (2) he sustained and supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted unjustly and wrongfully, or he deviated from the right course.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under special circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As the permission concerning polygamy has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken to be primarily based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can best be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. This can generally happen in one of the following cases:
(1) A man has a number of orphans, including girls, to look after. He is unmarried and there is danger of his falling into temptation. In this case he should marry one or more girls, as the case may be, from among his wards and thus protect himself from falling into sin or from betraying his trust and acting wrongfully towards his wards.
(2) He is married, but his wife fails to treat the orphans properly. He may in such a case also marry one of his female wards so that they may have a good and separate home of their own.
(3) Some of his younger relations, e.g., brothers or sisters, become orphans, and he finds that he or his existing wife cannot properly look after them. In such an eventuality, he may marry a suitable woman of mature age who may treat them like a mother. It is on record that in similar circumstances Jabir, a young man and one of the Holy Prophet’s distinguished Companions, married a widow of mature age and when the Prophet asked him why he had not married a young girl, Jabir replied that he had done so that his wife might look after his brothers and sisters who were left orphans by the death of his father. The Holy Prophet was much pleased at this act of Jabir and prayed for him (Bukhari, ch. on Buyu‘).
(4) If a person is afraid that the orphans under his care being strangers to him, he may not treat them as kindly as he should do, he may establish direct relationship with them by marrying one of the female wards.
(5) If a person has a large number of orphans under his care and he finds that he cannot do full justice to them without marrying more wives than one, he is permitted to do so to the limit of four.
The words, two or three or four, signify that the last number marks the utmost limit. It is related that after this verse was revealed, the Holy Prophet asked those of his Companions who had more than four wives to keep any four of them they liked and divorce the rest, so that the number might not exceed four (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah).
A general note on polygamy is appropriate here. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may also arise in which polygamy may become a necessary remedy for many social or moral evils.
If only the objects of marriage be considered, the permission of the Quran to its followers to wed more wives than one, appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the community not to take advantage of this permission. According to the Quran, the objects of marriage are four, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual maladies; (2) peace of mind and the availability of a loving companion; (3) procreation of children; and (4) widening of the circle of relationship.
With respect to the first-mentioned object, the Quran says: "And allowed to you are those beyond that, (i.e. the cases mentioned in the earlier verses) that you seek them by means of your property—marrying them properly (and guarding yourselves against animal passions) and not committing fornication (and not indulging in unrestricted gratification) (4:25). The word محصنین occurring in the verse quoted above is derived from احصان which means, to seek protection from the attacks of an enemy by entering into a fort. Thus Islam regards marriage as a sort of fort, or a means of protection against moral and spiritual diseases. With respect to this object the Quran further says: They (your wives) are a garment for you and you are a garment for them (2:188). Now, the dress of a person serves a threefold purpose: (1) It protects him against the inclemency of weather; (2) it serves as an embellishment and adornment; and (3) it covers one’s private parts and any defects that may be in one’s physical formation. With respect to the second object the Quran says: And of His Signs is this, that He has created wives for you from among yourselves that you may find peace of mind in them and He has engendered love and tenderness between you (30:22). About the third object it says: Your wives are a tilth for you so approach your tilth when and how you like (2:224).
Now every one can easily conceive that one or all of the above-mentioned four objects of marriage, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual diseases; (2) procreation and propagation of the human race: (3) company of a life-long and loving companion and (4) widening of the circle of relationship are, sometimes, not realized in the case of one wife only. It is a hard fact which cannot be denied that there are persons whose sexual instinct is too strong to be satisfied with one wife. This is a physical necessity inherent in man and it is playing with fire to make light of this, the most powerful of all physical instincts. The only sane and proper course open to a man whose sexual powers are abnormally strong is to marry another, if one wife does not satisfy him. Such cases may be rare, but you cannot ignore their existence altogether. And a perfect religious system, as Islam claims to be, has to provide for the physical and spiritual requirements of all sorts of people. Again, if the wife of a person becomes a permanent invalid or suffers from a contagious disease, the object of marriage is certainly defeated if such a person does not marry another wife. Indeed, no course is left to him but either to contract another lawful marriage or, failing successfully to combat the attacks of his passions, to lead a dissolute life. And an ailing wife cannot make a good companion either, because, however worthy of regard and com- passion she may be, her company cannot give peace of mind to her husband in all respects. In the third instance, if the wife of a person happens to be barren, the natural and perfectly legitimate desire of the husband to have an issue to succeed him and perpetuate his name remains unfulfilled in the absence of a polygamous marriage. It is to meet the requirements of all such persons that Islam has allowed the contraction of plural matrimonial relations. If, however, in any of these cases a husband divorces his first wife, it would be a shame and disgrace for him. For instance, in the case of an invalid wife it would mean that he lived with her as long as she was whole and deserted her at a time when she most needed his protection. The only honourable course in such a case would be to look after the diseased wife tenderly and marry another woman who may fulfil the functions of a wife.
It will thus be seen that the objects of a polygamous marriage are, to a certain extent, the same as those of a monogamous marriage. When one or all of those objects are not realized by a monogamous marriage, a polygamous marriage becomes a necessity and is allowed. There are, however, other reasons which may also render it necessary for a person to have one or more wives in addition to the one whom he dearly loves and who also fulfils the objects of marriage. Those reasons are: (a) to protect orphans; (b) to provide husbands for marriageable widows and (c) to supplement the decreasing manhood of a family or community.
It is manifestly clear from the verse under comment in which permission is given to marry more wives than one that polygamy is resorted to particularly with a view to taking under one’s protection orphans left unprotected. The verse clearly states: If you fear that you will not be fair in dealing with orphans (under your protection), then marry of women as may be agreeable to you, two or three or four; and if you fear you will not deal justly (between your wives) then marry only one. The words hint that the mother of such orphans as are left in the guardianship of a person should preferably be married by him so that he should become directly related to, and more intimately connected with, them and thus become more interested in their welfare than he otherwise could be.
Again, the Quran says: And marry widows from among you (24:33). To provide husbands for widows is thus another object which the institution of polygamy fulfils. Muslims were perpetually engaged in fighting in the time of the Holy Prophet. Many fell in wars and left behind widows and orphans without near relations to look after them. The preponderance of women over men and an exceptionally large number of orphans with no one to look after them, which is the inevitable result of war, necessitated that to save the Muslim society from moral degeneration, polygamous marriages should be encouraged. The last World War also vindicated this useful institution of Islam. It left an abnormally large number of young women without husbands. Indeed, the great preponderance of females over males in the west, due to the appalling loss of manhood caused by the War, is responsible for the present awful laxity of morals which is eating into the vitals of western society. Young girls fail to get suitable husbands. But natural passions must be satisfied. The result is dissolution and depravity. In view of the moral depravity prevailing in many countries, who has the hardihood to deny the wisdom of the Islamic institution of polygamy? Many indescribable moral and physical evils have arisen in the west as the result of this preponderance of women over men, the only proper remedy for which is polygamy.
The institution of polygamy is also intended to meet the serious situation that follows in the wake of a war, when, besides other aspects of decline, the manhood of a nation becomes so depleted as to threaten national destruction. The fall of birth-rate, which is a potent cause of the decay of a people and from which some Western countries are badly suffering, can be effectively remedied only by resorting to polygamy. The West will never recover from the terrible moral and social diseases from which it is suffering as well as from the appalling numerical decline facing certain countries and communities unless, setting aside all false notions and false sentiments, it submits to the Islamic injunctions about polygamy. It is a sacrifice demanded of men and women alike—a sacrifice in which personal and passing sentiments are required to be partly ignored for the wider and permanent interests of whole communities and countries.
a
4:130.
310
此节经文很重要。因为在一定条件下, 这儿允许一夫多妻。伊斯兰教允许 (虽然它肯定不会命令和鼓励) 一个男于同时可娶一至四个妻子。因为给予这种许可是与孤儿问题有关的, 所以应该在关心那个备受忽视的社会阶层的问题的基础上看待这种许可。在某些情况下, 只有按照环境的迫切需要从受监护的女性孤儿或其他女子中娶一个或超过一个妻子, 孤儿的权利才能得到保护。虽然这节经文所提到的一夫多妻与孤儿问题有关, 但是这种婚姻也可能由其它情况而引起, 如通过这种婚姻来纠正一些社会和道德上的弊病。如果只考虑这种婚姻本身的目的, 同意这种婚姻不仅是无可非议的, 而且在某种情况下, 是可取的, 甚至是十分必要的。在这种情况下, 不利用这种婚姻制度对个人与社会的利益, 无疑是有害的。根据 «古兰经», 婚姻的目的有四点: (1) 防止身体上、精神上以及道德上的疾病; (2:188; 4:25); (2) 安定精神, 得到爱侣 (30:22); (3) 生育子女; (4) 扩大亲戚的范围 (4:2)。有时候, 娶一个妻子就不能实现一个或全部上述婚姻目的。例如, 一个人的妻子永久病残, 或患上传染病时, 如果他不另娶妻子, 那么, 婚姻的目的就要受挫。实际上他毫无办法, 要么, 另订合法婚约, 要么, 因未能幸运地阻止情欲的侵袭而过着不道德的生活。一个患病的妻子也成不了幸福的伴侣, 因为不论她给丈夫如何有价值的关怀和同情, 但是她与她的丈夫在一起不能在各方面去安定丈夫的精神。同样, 如果妻子碰巧不能生育, 又没有一夫多妻制, 那么, 丈夫子嗣名留的这一完全正常自然要求就不能实现。正是为了满足这种迫切的需要, 伊斯兰教允许一夫多妻制度。如果出于上述任何一个情况, 丈夫与其第一个妻子离婚, 这是对他的一种耻辱。事实上, 一夫多妻的婚姻目的在某种程度上与一夫一妻婚姻目的是一样的。在一夫一妻制婚姻不能实现其中的一个或所有目的时, 一夫多妻婚姻就十分必要了。而且, 尽管他已有一个深深地爱着的妻子, 并也已达到了婚姻目的。但也有其他一些理由使某男子必须另娶一个或多个妻子, 那些理由是: (a) 保护孤儿; (b) 使可以结婚的寡妇得到丈夫; (c) 为缺少男子的家庭或社团增补男子。从注释的这节经文中, 我们清楚地看到, 采取一夫多妻制特别是为了将未受人保护的孤儿置于某人的保护之下。此节经文的含意是: 像这些需要受人保护的孤儿的母亲最好与保护人结婚, 这祥, 那保护人与这些孤儿的关系就更加直接与亲密, 比在其他情况下更关心他们的福利, 使寡妇们能得到丈夫 (24:33) 是制定一夫多妻制的另一个目的。在穆圣时代, 穆斯林迫于长期的战争。许多人在战争中死去, 留下了没有近亲照顾的寡妇和孤儿。妇女在数量上大为超过男子以及人数非常多的无人照顾的孤儿--------这是战争不可避免的结果--------鼓励一夫多妻以防止穆斯林社会的道德堕落。最近的两次世界大战证明伊斯兰教的这种婚姻制度是有用的。大战撇下了数量非常众多没有丈夫的年轻妇女。确实, 由于两次大战造成男子惊人的死亡, 使西方国家的妇女人数大大超过了男子, 这是目前西方社会道德败坏的原因, 它正在腐蚀西方社会的机体。除了使年轻的寡妇能得到丈夫外, 一夫多妻制的目的还在于应付战后发生的严重形势。战后除了各方面都在衰退外, 国家的男子人数急剧减少到使国家有可能灭亡的危险。人口出生率下降是民族衰亡的重要原因, 只有一夫多妻制能有效地改善这种情况。这种婚姻制度并非如人们所误解的那样, 是为了情欲的发泄。它的本质是需要男子和妇女作出牺牲, 这种牺牲要求个人的一时感情服从社会和国家的更大的利益。
311
مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语的一般意义是女战俘。她们没有被赎出, 被俘后在穆斯林的拘留和看管之下。因为她们参加战争想摧毁伊斯兰教, 因此理应剥夺她们的自由。在 «古兰经» 中用这一名称, 而不大用 عِبَادْ (‘Ibad, 奴隶) 和 اِمَاء (Ima’, 女奴隶), 为的要指出这种占有是公正和合法的。مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin) 的意思是 “完全和正义的占有” (لِسَانْ, Lisan)。它包括奴隶和女奴隶两种意思。究竟在句中这一用语用在特定的地方意指什么, 须视上下文而定。关于 “他们自己所掌握的” 一语, 有许多误解: 这句话什么意思, 他们自己所掌握的人有什么权利和地位。伊斯兰教毫不含糊地谴责奴隶制。因此, 剥夺一个人 (他或她) 的自由是一种道德上的罪过。除非他或她参加战争来摧毁伊斯兰教或一个伊斯兰国家, 当然要剥夺他们的自由。买卖奴隶也是一种很严重的罪过。伊斯兰教的教导在这点上是十分清楚、毫不含糊和反复强调的, 按照这一教导, 假如有人使另一个人做他的奴隶, 他就对安拉和人类犯了严重的罪行 {الْبَيْع بُخارِی، كِتَابُ--------Bukhari, Kitabul-Bai‘ & دَاؤُد--------Da’ud, 由 فَتْحُ الْبَارِی--------Fathul-Bari摘录}。值得注意的是, 伊斯兰教在世界上开始建立的时候, 奴隶制是人类
*社会制度中的一个组成部分, 每个国家都有大量的奴隶。因此, 把一种已经紧密交织在整个人类社会组织之中的制度一下子抹掉而不严重伤害它的道德风气, 这是行不通, 甚至是不明智的。因此, 伊斯兰教力求逐渐地但有效而坚定地废除奴隶制。«古兰经» 制订了以下几条有效的法规以迅速而完善的废除奴隶制: (1) 只能在正规战以后抓战俘; (2) 在战争结束后不能扣留战俘不放, 但是 (3) 作为一种恩惠的表示, 或者可以用交换战俘的方式来释放战俘 (47:5)。但是, 那些由于不适合以上那些条例而得不到自由的不幸的人们, 或者应该留在他们的穆斯林主人那里的人, 可以和他们的主人书写一个赎身合同 (24:34)。这样的话, 如果一个女人在上述性质的情况下作了战俘, 丧失了自由, 成为 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin), 她不能在交换战俘中获释, 政府的困境也不许可其以恩惠的表示而立即释放她, 她的政府或人们也不来赎买她, 她也不寻求和主人书立合同来买她的自由, 那么, 为
了道德起见, 他的主人在没有她事先同意的情况下娶了她, 有什么可以反对或有意见的呢? 至于没有和一个女战俘或奴隶结婚而发生性关系, 这在 «古兰经» 任何一节经文中也没有说过可以这么做。«古兰经» 不仅认为没有正式结婚是不可以把女战俘当妻子对待, 而且有清楚而确定的命令, 这些战俘像自由的妇女一样, 必须结了婚才能作为妻子。其中惟一的区别是社会地位的暂时的差别。由于她们参加反对伊斯兰教的战争而丧失了婚前同意的权利, 因此和她们结婚不必考虑像对自由妇女那样去徵求她们事先的同意。因此 مَا مَلَكَتْ اَيْمَانُكُمْ (Ma Malakat Aimanukum) 这一用语意指女战俘。按照 «古兰经», 无论如何也不会支持这样的看法, 说伊斯兰教批准非法同居。除了这节经文外, 至少还有其它四节经文以清楚而明确的条文制定了女战俘不应常处于不结婚状态中 (2:222; 4:4; 4:26; 24:33)。穆圣在这点也是态度非常鲜明的, 据记载他曾经说过, “如果某一个人有一个年幼的女奴隶, 他给她以正当的教育, 并用适当方式把她扶养成人, 然后解放并娶她为妻, 对他来说, 这是双重的报答” (الْعِلْم بُخَارِی، كِتَابُ Bukhari, Kitabul-‘Ilm)。穆圣这一说法的意思是, 如果一个穆斯林想要娶女奴隶为妻, 他必须先解放她, 然后娶她。穆圣自己的做法与这一训律十分符合。他的两个妻子朱伟里亚 (جُوَيْرِيَة, Juwairiyah) 和萨菲亚 (صَفِيَّة, Safiyyah) 就是作为战俘而来到他那里的。她们是他的 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin)。但他按照伊斯兰教的律令娶了她们。他也娶了 مَارِيَة (Mariyah), 她是埃及国王送给他的, 她享有像穆圣其他妻子那样的自由的地位。她戴上头盖, 并也被视为 “穆民之母”。«古兰经» 说得很清楚, 有关婚姻的律令适用于 “你们自己所掌握的 (奴婢)” 就像适用于 “穆圣姑父母、舅父母和姨父母的女儿” 那样。她们两个人都是结婚后才作为妻子的。以上所说的三类妇女都是通过结婚对穆圣才是合法的 (33:51)。还有, “禁止你们娶已婚的妇女, 除非你们具有所有权的,” (4:25) 这节经文连同上一节经文都述及到, 如果一个男人娶这种女人 (其中包括已婚的女人), 那是不合法的。但这里有个例外, 在宗教战争中被俘的那些已婚妇女宁愿留在穆斯林那里, 是可以同她们的主人结婚的。她们不愿回到以前丈夫那里去的这一事实被认为等于解除了她们过去的婚约。
这方面, 顺便还有一点值得注意, 不准许同一个女奴隶在禁止范围内的这样一些女亲属 (相应于一个自由妇女的那些亲属) 结婚。例如: 奴隶妻子的母亲、姐妹、女儿等是不能结婚的。要进一步讲清楚的是, 由于启示那个时候的环境, «古兰经» 必须区别两种妇女的社会地位。那种区别用 زَوْج (Zauj, 娶自由的妇女) 和 مِلْكُ يَمِيْن (Milku Yamin, 娶奴隶奴女) 等词来表达。前者意味着夫妻间是平等的, 而后者意味着妻子的地位要差一些。不过, 那是暂时的。«古兰经» 和穆圣极力劝告, 必须先给女奴隶完全的自由和地位, 然后娶她们。穆圣就是这样做的。此外, 伊斯兰教不准许在一般战争中俘虏妇女作为奴隶。未徵得一个女奴隶的事先同意而和她结婚, 只是在以下的情况下才可以: 敌对国先发动反对伊斯兰教的宗教战争, 想消灭伊斯兰教, 并在剑尖下强迫穆斯林放弃他们的宗教, 然后把他们的俘虏--------男的或女的--------作为奴隶对待, 就像在穆圣时代他们做的那样。那时, 敌人抓去穆斯林妇女作为俘虏并把他们当作奴隶看待。伊斯兰教的命令只是一种报复措施, 就其真实的性质来说, 它的时间是短暂的。它也具有保护被俘妇女德行的意义。现在那些条件已不复存在。现在没有宗教战争, 因此没有战俘被当作奴隶或女奴看待。
2
یعنی یتیم عورتوں سے ایک سے زیادہ شادیاں کرنی اچھی نہیں۔ کیونکہ بے انصافی کا ڈر ہے۔ ہاں ان کے سوا دوسری عورتوں سے دو دو‘ تین تین‘ چار چار سے نکاح کر سکتے ہو کیونکہ ان کے ولی ان کے حقوق کا مطالبہ کرنے والے موجود ہیں۔
3
یعنی اس طریق پر عمل کرکے تم ظلم اور گناہ کے خطرہ سے بہت حد تک محفوظ ہو جاؤ گے۔
b
4:130.
486
Important Words:
طاب (as may be agreeable). طاب الشیء means, the thing was or became pleasing, delightful, agreeable or delicious. طابت به نفسی means, my mind or my soul became pleased and satisfied with it. طاب العیش لفلان means, life became pleasant and free from cares for such a one. طاب عن الشیء نفسا means, he willingly parted with the thing (Aqrab & Lane).
مثنی (two) is derived from ثنی. They say ثناہ i.e. he doubled it or folded it; or he turned one part of it upon another. ثنیsignifies the repetition of a thing, doing it one time after another, or a thing or affair done twice. مثنی means اثنان اثنان i.e. two and two; two and two together; or two at a time and two at a time. Similarly, ثلاث means, three and three; three and three together; or three at a time and three at a time; and so is the meaning of رباع (Lane & Aqrab). The expression مثنی و ثلاث و رباع would thus mean, two at a time, or three at a time, or four at a time.
تعولوا (do injustice) is derived from عال which means:(1) he had a family or a large family; (2) he sustained and supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted unjustly and wrongfully, or he deviated from the right course.
Commentary:
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under special circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As the permission concerning polygamy has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken to be primarily based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can best be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. This can generally happen in one of the following cases:
(1) A man has a number of orphans, including girls, to look after. He is unmarried and there is danger of his falling into temptation. In this case he should marry one or more girls, as the case may be, from among his wards and thus protect himself from falling into sin or from betraying his trust and acting wrongfully towards his wards.
(2) He is married, but his wife fails to treat the orphans properly. He may in such a case also marry one of his female wards so that they may have a good and separate home of their own.
(3) Some of his younger relations, e.g., brothers or sisters, become orphans, and he finds that he or his existing wife cannot properly look after them. In such an eventuality, he may marry a suitable woman of mature age who may treat them like a mother. It is on record that in similar circumstances Jabir, a young man and one of the Holy Prophet’s distinguished Companions, married a widow of mature age and when the Prophet asked him why he had not married a young girl, Jabir replied that he had done so that his wife might look after his brothers and sisters who were left orphans by the death of his father. The Holy Prophet was much pleased at this act of Jabir and prayed for him (Bukhari, ch. on Buyu‘).
(4) If a person is afraid that the orphans under his care being strangers to him, he may not treat them as kindly as he should do, he may establish direct relationship with them by marrying one of the female wards.
(5) If a person has a large number of orphans under his care and he finds that he cannot do full justice to them without marrying more wives than one, he is permitted to do so to the limit of four.
The words, two or three or four, signify that the last number marks the utmost limit. It is related that after this verse was revealed, the Holy Prophet asked those of his Companions who had more than four wives to keep any four of them they liked and divorce the rest, so that the number might not exceed four (Tirmidhi, ch. on Nikah).
A general note on polygamy is appropriate here. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may also arise in which polygamy may become a necessary remedy for many social or moral evils.
If only the objects of marriage be considered, the permission of the Quran to its followers to wed more wives than one, appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the community not to take advantage of this permission. According to the Quran, the objects of marriage are four, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual maladies; (2) peace of mind and the availability of a loving companion; (3) procreation of children; and (4) widening of the circle of relationship.
With respect to the first-mentioned object, the Quran says: "And allowed to you are those beyond that, (i.e. the cases mentioned in the earlier verses) that you seek them by means of your property—marrying them properly (and guarding yourselves against animal passions) and not committing fornication (and not indulging in unrestricted gratification) (4:25). The word محصنین occurring in the verse quoted above is derived from احصان which means, to seek protection from the attacks of an enemy by entering into a fort. Thus Islam regards marriage as a sort of fort, or a means of protection against moral and spiritual diseases. With respect to this object the Quran further says: They (your wives) are a garment for you and you are a garment for them (2:188). Now, the dress of a person serves a threefold purpose: (1) It protects him against the inclemency of weather; (2) it serves as an embellishment and adornment; and (3) it covers one’s private parts and any defects that may be in one’s physical formation. With respect to the second object the Quran says: And of His Signs is this, that He has created wives for you from among yourselves that you may find peace of mind in them and He has engendered love and tenderness between you (30:22). About the third object it says: Your wives are a tilth for you so approach your tilth when and how you like (2:224).
Now every one can easily conceive that one or all of the above-mentioned four objects of marriage, i.e. (1) protection against physical, moral and spiritual diseases; (2) procreation and propagation of the human race: (3) company of a life-long and loving companion and (4) widening of the circle of relationship are, sometimes, not realized in the case of one wife only. It is a hard fact which cannot be denied that there are persons whose sexual instinct is too strong to be satisfied with one wife. This is a physical necessity inherent in man and it is playing with fire to make light of this, the most powerful of all physical instincts. The only sane and proper course open to a man whose sexual powers are abnormally strong is to marry another, if one wife does not satisfy him. Such cases may be rare, but you cannot ignore their existence altogether. And a perfect religious system, as Islam claims to be, has to provide for the physical and spiritual requirements of all sorts of people. Again, if the wife of a person becomes a permanent invalid or suffers from a contagious disease, the object of marriage is certainly defeated if such a person does not marry another wife. Indeed, no course is left to him but either to contract another lawful marriage or, failing successfully to combat the attacks of his passions, to lead a dissolute life. And an ailing wife cannot make a good companion either, because, however worthy of regard and com- passion she may be, her company cannot give peace of mind to her husband in all respects. In the third instance, if the wife of a person happens to be barren, the natural and perfectly legitimate desire of the husband to have an issue to succeed him and perpetuate his name remains unfulfilled in the absence of a polygamous marriage. It is to meet the requirements of all such persons that Islam has allowed the contraction of plural matrimonial relations. If, however, in any of these cases a husband divorces his first wife, it would be a shame and disgrace for him. For instance, in the case of an invalid wife it would mean that he lived with her as long as she was whole and deserted her at a time when she most needed his protection. The only honourable course in such a case would be to look after the diseased wife tenderly and marry another woman who may fulfil the functions of a wife.
It will thus be seen that the objects of a polygamous marriage are, to a certain extent, the same as those of a monogamous marriage. When one or all of those objects are not realized by a monogamous marriage, a polygamous marriage becomes a necessity and is allowed. There are, however, other reasons which may also render it necessary for a person to have one or more wives in addition to the one whom he dearly loves and who also fulfils the objects of marriage. Those reasons are: (a) to protect orphans; (b) to provide husbands for marriageable widows and (c) to supplement the decreasing manhood of a family or community.
It is manifestly clear from the verse under comment in which permission is given to marry more wives than one that polygamy is resorted to particularly with a view to taking under one’s protection orphans left unprotected. The verse clearly states: If you fear that you will not be fair in dealing with orphans (under your protection), then marry of women as may be agreeable to you, two or three or four; and if you fear you will not deal justly (between your wives) then marry only one. The words hint that the mother of such orphans as are left in the guardianship of a person should preferably be married by him so that he should become directly related to, and more intimately connected with, them and thus become more interested in their welfare than he otherwise could be.
Again, the Quran says: And marry widows from among you (24:33). To provide husbands for widows is thus another object which the institution of polygamy fulfils. Muslims were perpetually engaged in fighting in the time of the Holy Prophet. Many fell in wars and left behind widows and orphans without near relations to look after them. The preponderance of women over men and an exceptionally large number of orphans with no one to look after them, which is the inevitable result of war, necessitated that to save the Muslim society from moral degeneration, polygamous marriages should be encouraged. The last World War also vindicated this useful institution of Islam. It left an abnormally large number of young women without husbands. Indeed, the great preponderance of females over males in the west, due to the appalling loss of manhood caused by the War, is responsible for the present awful laxity of morals which is eating into the vitals of western society. Young girls fail to get suitable husbands. But natural passions must be satisfied. The result is dissolution and depravity. In view of the moral depravity prevailing in many countries, who has the hardihood to deny the wisdom of the Islamic institution of polygamy? Many indescribable moral and physical evils have arisen in the west as the result of this preponderance of women over men, the only proper remedy for which is polygamy.
The institution of polygamy is also intended to meet the serious situation that follows in the wake of a war, when, besides other aspects of decline, the manhood of a nation becomes so depleted as to threaten national destruction. The fall of birth-rate, which is a potent cause of the decay of a people and from which some Western countries are badly suffering, can be effectively remedied only by resorting to polygamy. The West will never recover from the terrible moral and social diseases from which it is suffering as well as from the appalling numerical decline facing certain countries and communities unless, setting aside all false notions and false sentiments, it submits to the Islamic injunctions about polygamy. It is a sacrifice demanded of men and women alike—a sacrifice in which personal and passing sentiments are required to be partly ignored for the wider and permanent interests of whole communities and countries.
b
4:130.
560
The verse is important inasmuch as it permits polygamy under certain circumstances. Islam allows (though it certainly does not enjoin or encourage) a man to have more than one wife up to four at a time. As this permission has been given in connection with the subject of orphans, it should be taken primarily to be based on the question of the care of that much-neglected class of society. There are cases when the interests of orphans can only be protected by marrying one or more wives from among the female wards or from other women as the exigencies of circumstances may require. Though the verse mentions polygamy in connection with the subject of orphans, yet other situations may arise when it may become a necessary remedy for some social or moral evils. If only the objects of marriage itself are considered, the permission appears to be not only justifiable but in some cases desirable and even necessary; nay, in such cases it may become positively injurious to the best interests of individuals and of the com
561
The expression, Ma Malakat Aimanukum, generally signifies, women prisoners of war who are not ransomed and who are in the custody and control of their Muslim captors because they had taken part in a war which was waged to destroy Islam and thus had legitimately deprived themselves of their freedom. The term has been used in the Qur’an in preference to ‘Ibad and Ima’ (slaves and bondwomen) to point to a just and rightful possession, the expression Milku Yamin signifying full and rightful possession (Lisan). It includes both slaves and bondwomen, and it is only the context which determines what the expression signifies in a particular place. Much misunderstanding prevails as to what the expression "their right hands possess" signifies, and what are the rights and status of the persons to whom it applies. Islam has condemned slavery in unequivocal terms. According to it, it is a mortal sin to deprive a person of his or her liberty, unless, of course, he or she renders himself
562
Ta‘ulu (do injustice) is derived from ‘Ala which means; (1) he had a large family; (2) he supported the family; (3) he was or became poor; (4) he acted wrongfully; or deviated from the right course (Lane).
یُوۡصِیۡکُمُ اللّٰہُ فِیۡۤ اَوۡلٰدِکُمۡ ۖ لِلذَّکَرِ مِثۡلُ حَظِّ الۡاُنۡثَیَیۡنِ ۚ فَاِنۡ کُنَّ نِسَآءً فَوۡقَ اثۡنَتَیۡنِ فَلَہُنَّ ثُلُثَا مَا تَرَکَ ۖ وَاِنۡ کَانَتۡ وٰحِدَۃً فَلَہَا النِّصۡفُ ۚ وَلِاَبَوَیۡہِ لِکُلِّ وٰحِدٍ مِّنۡہُمَا السُّدُسُ مِمَّا تَرَکَ اِنۡ کَانَ لَہٗ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہٗ وَلَدٌ وَّوَرِثَہٗۤ اَبَوَاہُ فَلِاُمِّہِ الثُّلُثُ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَہٗۤ اِخۡوَۃٌ فَلِاُمِّہِ السُّدُسُ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصِیۡ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۗ اٰبَآؤُکُمۡ وَاَبۡنَآؤُکُمۡ لَا تَدۡرُوۡنَ اَیُّہُمۡ اَقۡرَبُ لَکُمۡ نَفۡعًا ۚ فَرِیۡضَۃً مِّنَ اللّٰہِ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ عَلِیۡمًا حَکِیۡمًا
4:177.
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
4:177.
Father and mother both (Lane).
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
4:177.
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
314
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
b
4:177.
494
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
573
Father and mother both (Lane).
574
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
574A
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
۞ وَلَکُمۡ نِصۡفُ مَا تَرَکَ اَزۡوٰجُکُمۡ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہُنَّ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَہُنَّ وَلَدٌ فَلَکُمُ الرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡنَ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصِیۡنَ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۚ وَلَہُنَّ الرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡتُمۡ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّکُمۡ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَکُمۡ وَلَدٌ فَلَہُنَّ الثُّمُنُ مِمَّا تَرَکۡتُمۡ ۚ مِّنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ تُوۡصُوۡنَ بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ ۗ وَاِنۡ کَانَ رَجُلٌ یُّوۡرَثُ کَلٰلَۃً اَوِ امۡرَاَۃٌ وَّلَہٗۤ اَخٌ اَوۡ اُخۡتٌ فَلِکُلِّ وٰحِدٍ مِّنۡہُمَا السُّدُسُ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانُوۡۤا اَکۡثَرَ مِنۡ ذٰلِکَ فَہُمۡ شُرَکَآءُ فِی الثُّلُثِ ۚ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ وَصِیَّۃٍ یُّوۡصٰی بِہَاۤ اَوۡ دَیۡنٍ غَیۡرَ مُضَآرٍّ ۚ وَصِیَّۃً مِّنَ اللّٰہِ ۗ وَاللّٰہُ عَلِیۡمٌ حَلِیۡمٌ
4:177.
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
4:177.
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
4:177.
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
315
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
316
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
1
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
a
4:177.
495
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
575
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
575A
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
وَاِنۡ اَرَدتُّمُ اسۡتِبۡدَالَ زَوۡجٍ مَّکَانَ زَوۡجٍ وَّاٰتَیۡتُمۡ اِحۡدٰٮہُنَّ قِنۡطَارًا فَلَا تَاۡخُذُوۡا مِنۡہُ شَیۡـًٔا ۚ اَتَاۡخُذُوۡنَہٗ بُہۡتٰنًا وَّاِثۡمًا مُّبِیۡنًا
If for some special reason a man wishes to divorce one wife and marry another, he is not allowed to take back from the former what he has already given her, no matter how big the sum may be.
Important Words:
بھتان (lying) is the noun-infinitive from بھت. They say بھته i.e. he slandered him or accused him falsely; or he did so in such a manner as to make him confounded at the falsity of the charge. بھتان therefore means, a calumny, slander or false accusation; falsehood by reason of which one is perplexed or confounded and is rendered unable to see his right course; a false accusation of adultery against a woman (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse does not mean that man can divorce his wife at will. Anas, a Companion of the Holy Prophet, relates that once Abu Ayyub and Abu Talha wanted to divorce their wives (without valid reason) and asked the Holy Prophet about it. He counselled them not to do so, characterizing their act as an act of injustice. Thereupon, they abandoned their intention of divorcing their wives and retained them. This does not mean that a husband cannot divorce his wife without obtaining the permission of the authorities; he can do so, if he so desires; but he will certainly be accountable before God if he does so without valid reason. Elsewhere the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "Surely of the things sanctioned by the Law of Islam the most hateful in the sight of God is divorce" (Dawud, ch. on, Talaq).
If for some special reason a man wishes to divorce one wife and marry another, he is not allowed to take back from the former what he has already given her, no matter however big the sum may be. If he does so, he will be guilty of infidelity and sin.
500
Important Words:
بھتان (lying) is the noun-infinitive from بھت. They say بھته i.e. he slandered him or accused him falsely; or he did so in such a manner as to make him confounded at the falsity of the charge. بھتان therefore means, a calumny, slander or false accusation; falsehood by reason of which one is perplexed or confounded and is rendered unable to see his right course; a false accusation of adultery against a woman (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse does not mean that man can divorce his wife at will. Anas, a Companion of the Holy Prophet, relates that once Abu Ayyub and Abu Talha wanted to divorce their wives (without valid reason) and asked the Holy Prophet about it. He counselled them not to do so, characterizing their act as an act of injustice. Thereupon, they abandoned their intention of divorcing their wives and retained them. This does not mean that a husband cannot divorce his wife without obtaining the permission of the authorities; he can do so, if he so desires; but he will certainly be accountable before God if he does so without valid reason. Elsewhere the Holy Prophet is reported to have said, "Surely of the things sanctioned by the Law of Islam the most hateful in the sight of God is divorce" (Dawud, ch. on, Talaq).
If for some special reason a man wishes to divorce one wife and marry another, he is not allowed to take back from the former what he has already given her, no matter however big the sum may be. If he does so, he will be guilty of infidelity and sin.
582
If for some special reason a man wishes to divorce one wife and marry another, he is not allowed to take back from the former what he has already given her, no matter how big the sum may be.
وَاِنۡ خِفۡتُمۡ شِقَاقَ بَیۡنِہِمَا فَابۡعَثُوۡا حَکَمًا مِّنۡ اَہۡلِہٖ وَحَکَمًا مِّنۡ اَہۡلِہَاۤ اِنۡ یُّرِیۡدَاۤ اِصۡلٰحًا یُّوَفِّقِ اللّٰہُ بَیۡنَہُمَاۤ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ عَلِیۡمًا خَبِیۡرًا
4:129.
4:129.
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
4:129.
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
a
4:129.
513
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
602
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
603
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا لَا تَقۡرَبُوا الصَّلٰوۃَ وَاَنۡتُمۡ سُکٰرٰی حَتّٰی تَعۡلَمُوۡا مَا تَقُوۡلُوۡنَ وَلَا جُنُبًا اِلَّا عَابِرِیۡ سَبِیۡلٍ حَتّٰی تَغۡتَسِلُوۡا ۚ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ مَّرۡضٰۤی اَوۡ عَلٰی سَفَرٍ اَوۡ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنۡکُمۡ مِّنَ الۡغَآئِطِ اَوۡ لٰمَسۡتُمُ النِّسَآءَ فَلَمۡ تَجِدُوۡا مَآءً فَتَیَمَّمُوۡا صَعِیۡدًا طَیِّبًا فَامۡسَحُوۡا بِوُجُوۡہِکُمۡ وَاَیۡدِیۡکُمۡ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ عَفُوًّا غَفُوۡرًا
اَوْ کے معنے عربی میں کبھی ’’یا‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں اور کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب جلد اول ص۶۰) اس جگہ ہم نے اس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘ کے کیے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس کے ساتھ آیت کا مفہوم واضح ہو جاتا ہے۔
یہ جُنُـبًا کا ہم مطلب ہے مگر جُنُـبًا کا لفظ چونکہ دور ہو گیا تھا اس لئے اس کے ہم معنے الفاظ اَوْ لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ استعمال کیے‘ ورنہ مضمون ایک ہی ہے۔
فَلَمْ تَجِدُوْا مَآءً درحقیقت اَوْ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنْکُمْ مِّنَ الْغَآئِطِ کی بھی خبر ہے۔ اور لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ کی بھی‘ اس لئے ہم نے دونوں کے ساتھ اسے لگا دیا ہے تاکہ ترجمہ ٹھیک ہو جائے۔
Sukara is the plural of Sakaran which means, a person who is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; in raptures of love; is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc. (Lane).
The expression, "nor when you are unclean," means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is not in full possession of his senses, similarly he cannot perform Prayers when he is unclean until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness, and vivacity necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after proper bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory for him. He can in this case perform Tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
Of the four classes, viz. the sick; those on a journey; those coming from the privy; and those having gone in unto their wives, only the last two, being in a state of uncleanness, need ablution or washing as the case may be, and if they do not find water, they can perform Tayammum. For the former two classes no condition as to water is necessary. They may resort to Tayammum even if they find water. This is why the words "while unclean" have been added after the words if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression "on a journey" is the same as the expression "travelling along a way", both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing. Dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility; similarly dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he is created (30:21).
Important Words:
سکاری (not in full possession of your senses) is the plural of سکران which is derived from سکر i.e. he was or became intoxicated, inebriated or drunken. They say سکر علی فلان i.e. such a one became angry or violently angry with him. سکرت الریح means, the wind, became still after blowing. سکر الباب means, he closed or stopped up the door. سکرة الموت means, the intoxication or agony of death which causes confusion of intellect and deprives the sufferer of reason. سکرة الھم والنومmeans, the oppressive sensation, etc. attendant upon anxiety and upon sleep. سکر (sukrun) which is the noun-infinitive from the verb سکر means, the state of intoxication, inebriation or drunkenness; a state that intervenes as an obstruction between a man and his intellect, mostly used in relation to intoxicating drinks but sometimes as meaning such a state arising from anger or from the passion of love, etc. (Lane). For further explanation see 15:73; 22:3. In view of the different meanings of this word a person would be called سکران (intoxicated) when he is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; or in raptures of love; or has received a great and sudden shock; or is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc.
جنبا (unclean) is derived from جنب. They say جنبه i.e. he led him or it by his side; he put him or it at a distance. جنب الیهmeans he was or became disquieted by a vehement desire to see or meet him. جنابة means distance; the stage of being unclean owing to sexual intercourse or discharge of semen, when it becomes obligatory for one to perform total ablution by bathing. جنب means, stranger; one who is distant and remote; or ( who is under the obligation of performing total ablution (bathing) by reason of sexual intercourse or discharge of semen. The word is used both as masculine and feminine, singular and plural (Lane).
عابری سبیل (are travelling along a way) عابری is really عابرین which is the plural of عابر which is derived from عبر. They say عبرہ i.e. he crossed it, went across it, or passed over it from one side to another. عبر السبیل means, he travelled or passed along the way or road. عبر also means, he died, as though he had travelled the road of life (Lane). The expression عابری سبیل signifies one who is actually travelling. Every person away from home cannot be called عابری سبیل. Again, if a person is away from home on a journey but halts at a place or decides to stay in a town or village for a few days, he will not be reckoner as one of the عابری سبیل (those travelling along a way); but if, while travelling, he halts for a night on the roadside, for example in a inn or at a rest-house or at a railway station, etc., he will be regarded as one.
غائط (privy) is derived from غاط which means, he or it became hidden in the ground; he dug, excavated or hollowed out in the earth; it sank or became depressed in the ground; it descended or sloped downwards in the ground. غائط therefore means:(1) a wide and depressed piece of ground having acclivities bordering it; (2) a place in which one satisfies one’s want of nature, the custom being to do so in a depressed place where one may remain hidden; (3) human excrement or ordure because it is cast away in a غائط (a depressed place). The expression اتی الغائط means, he responded to the call of nature; he satisfied the want of nature; he voided excrement or ordure (Lane).
تیمموا (betake yourselves to) is derived from یممه. They say یممه i.e. he aimed at it or desired it, or he betook himself to it. تیمم المریض means, the sick man, instead of performing the usual ablution for Prayer, betook himself to pure dust and wiped his face and hands therewith. تیمم (tayammum) is technically the process of striking the palms of the hands on the surface of pure earth and then wiping or passing them over the face, etc., in the prescribed manner (Taj).
Commentary:
According to this verse, Prayer cannot be considered to have been properly performed if the devotee simply repeats the words of Prayer without understanding what he says. It is also implicit in the verse that a non-Arab Muslim, besides praying in the prescribed Arabic words, should also pray to God and supplicate to Him in his own tongue, in the language which he usually speaks and in which he can best express his thoughts and feelings.
The word سکاری though primarily meaning "intoxicated" is, as shown under Important Words, much wider in its significance. Any state or condition in which one is not in full possession of oneself, either through anger or love or hunger or sleep, etc. is included in this expression. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If a man is sleepy, then he should not say his Prayers till the state of sleepiness has left him" (Bukhari, ch. on Wudu’). Again: "A man should not say his Prayers when he is hungry and the food has been placed before him (Bukhari, ch. on Salat), or when the call of nature demands his attention" (Dawud, ch. on Taharat).
The expression, nor when you are unclean, means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is in a state of سکر (not in full possession of his senses). Similarly, he cannot perform Prayers in a state of being جنبا (for the meaning of which see Important Words above), until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness and readiness necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after properly bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory on him for the performance of Prayers. He can in this case perform tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
The sentence, if you are ill or you are on a journey (while unclean) or if one of you comes from the privy or you have touched women and you find no water, then betake yourselves to pure dust, mentions four classes of persons on whom وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution) is not obligatory for the performance of Prayer, they being required to perform what is known as tayammum, i.e. betaking to pure dust and wiping therewith the face and the hands, as detailed in Hadith and Sunnah. These four classes are: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; (3) those coming from the privy; (4) those touching women, (i.e. having carnal knowledge of them). Out of these four classes only the last two are such as produce a state of uncleanness, necessitating the performance of وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution), as the case may be. So the clause, and you find no water, only relates to them. The verse thus purports to say that if the last-mentioned two classes of men do not find water, they can perform tayammum, i.e. wipe their faces and hands with pure dust before saying their Prayers.
In the case of the former two clauses no condition as to water is necessary. These two classes of men may resort to تیمم (tayammum) even if they find water. This is why the words, "and you are unclean" have been supplied after the words, if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression علی سفر (on a journey), in the present verse, is the same as the expression عابری سبیل (travelling along a way), both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing.
Finally, it must be noted that dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility, similarly, dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he was created (He created you from dust, 30:21). But the dust used must be pure, which is a necessary condition for the performance of Prayers. Any excess should be blown away before it is used in order to ensure just the minimum quantity for the performance of تیمم.
From the verse it is clear that though performing proper ablution is ordinarily necessary for Prayers yet, Islam being a perfect religion, one is allowed to substitute tayammum in place of ablution in certain exceptional cases.
2
اَوْ کے معنے عربی میں کبھی ’’یا‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں اور کبھی ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں۔ (مُغْنی اللَّبِیب جلد اول ص۶۰) اس جگہ ہم نے اس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘ کے کیے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس کے ساتھ آیت کا مفہوم واضح ہو جاتا ہے۔
3
یہ جُنُـبًا کا ہم مطلب ہے مگر جُنُـبًا کا لفظ چونکہ دور ہو گیا تھا اس لئے اس کے ہم معنے الفاظ اَوْ لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ استعمال کیے‘ ورنہ مضمون ایک ہی ہے۔
4
فَلَمْ تَجِدُوْا مَآءً درحقیقت اَوْ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنْکُمْ مِّنَ الْغَآئِطِ کی بھی خبر ہے۔ اور لٰمَسْتُمُ النِّسَآءَ کی بھی‘ اس لئے ہم نے دونوں کے ساتھ اسے لگا دیا ہے تاکہ ترجمہ ٹھیک ہو جائے۔
520
Important Words:
سکاری (not in full possession of your senses) is the plural of سکران which is derived from سکر i.e. he was or became intoxicated, inebriated or drunken. They say سکر علی فلان i.e. such a one became angry or violently angry with him. سکرت الریح means, the wind, became still after blowing. سکر الباب means, he closed or stopped up the door. سکرة الموت means, the intoxication or agony of death which causes confusion of intellect and deprives the sufferer of reason. سکرة الھم والنومmeans, the oppressive sensation, etc. attendant upon anxiety and upon sleep. سکر (sukrun) which is the noun-infinitive from the verb سکر means, the state of intoxication, inebriation or drunkenness; a state that intervenes as an obstruction between a man and his intellect, mostly used in relation to intoxicating drinks but sometimes as meaning such a state arising from anger or from the passion of love, etc. (Lane). For further explanation see 15:73; 22:3. In view of the different meanings of this word a person would be called سکران (intoxicated) when he is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; or in raptures of love; or has received a great and sudden shock; or is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc.
جنبا (unclean) is derived from جنب. They say جنبه i.e. he led him or it by his side; he put him or it at a distance. جنب الیهmeans he was or became disquieted by a vehement desire to see or meet him. جنابة means distance; the stage of being unclean owing to sexual intercourse or discharge of semen, when it becomes obligatory for one to perform total ablution by bathing. جنب means, stranger; one who is distant and remote; or ( who is under the obligation of performing total ablution (bathing) by reason of sexual intercourse or discharge of semen. The word is used both as masculine and feminine, singular and plural (Lane).
عابری سبیل (are travelling along a way) عابری is really عابرین which is the plural of عابر which is derived from عبر. They say عبرہ i.e. he crossed it, went across it, or passed over it from one side to another. عبر السبیل means, he travelled or passed along the way or road. عبر also means, he died, as though he had travelled the road of life (Lane). The expression عابری سبیل signifies one who is actually travelling. Every person away from home cannot be called عابری سبیل. Again, if a person is away from home on a journey but halts at a place or decides to stay in a town or village for a few days, he will not be reckoner as one of the عابری سبیل (those travelling along a way); but if, while travelling, he halts for a night on the roadside, for example in a inn or at a rest-house or at a railway station, etc., he will be regarded as one.
غائط (privy) is derived from غاط which means, he or it became hidden in the ground; he dug, excavated or hollowed out in the earth; it sank or became depressed in the ground; it descended or sloped downwards in the ground. غائط therefore means:(1) a wide and depressed piece of ground having acclivities bordering it; (2) a place in which one satisfies one’s want of nature, the custom being to do so in a depressed place where one may remain hidden; (3) human excrement or ordure because it is cast away in a غائط (a depressed place). The expression اتی الغائط means, he responded to the call of nature; he satisfied the want of nature; he voided excrement or ordure (Lane).
تیمموا (betake yourselves to) is derived from یممه. They say یممه i.e. he aimed at it or desired it, or he betook himself to it. تیمم المریض means, the sick man, instead of performing the usual ablution for Prayer, betook himself to pure dust and wiped his face and hands therewith. تیمم (tayammum) is technically the process of striking the palms of the hands on the surface of pure earth and then wiping or passing them over the face, etc., in the prescribed manner (Taj).
Commentary:
According to this verse, Prayer cannot be considered to have been properly performed if the devotee simply repeats the words of Prayer without understanding what he says. It is also implicit in the verse that a non-Arab Muslim, besides praying in the prescribed Arabic words, should also pray to God and supplicate to Him in his own tongue, in the language which he usually speaks and in which he can best express his thoughts and feelings.
The word سکاری though primarily meaning "intoxicated" is, as shown under Important Words, much wider in its significance. Any state or condition in which one is not in full possession of oneself, either through anger or love or hunger or sleep, etc. is included in this expression. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "If a man is sleepy, then he should not say his Prayers till the state of sleepiness has left him" (Bukhari, ch. on Wudu’). Again: "A man should not say his Prayers when he is hungry and the food has been placed before him (Bukhari, ch. on Salat), or when the call of nature demands his attention" (Dawud, ch. on Taharat).
The expression, nor when you are unclean, means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is in a state of سکر (not in full possession of his senses). Similarly, he cannot perform Prayers in a state of being جنبا (for the meaning of which see Important Words above), until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness and readiness necessary for worship.
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after properly bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory on him for the performance of Prayers. He can in this case perform tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
The sentence, if you are ill or you are on a journey (while unclean) or if one of you comes from the privy or you have touched women and you find no water, then betake yourselves to pure dust, mentions four classes of persons on whom وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution) is not obligatory for the performance of Prayer, they being required to perform what is known as tayammum, i.e. betaking to pure dust and wiping therewith the face and the hands, as detailed in Hadith and Sunnah. These four classes are: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; (3) those coming from the privy; (4) those touching women, (i.e. having carnal knowledge of them). Out of these four classes only the last two are such as produce a state of uncleanness, necessitating the performance of وضوء (ablution) or غسل (total ablution), as the case may be. So the clause, and you find no water, only relates to them. The verse thus purports to say that if the last-mentioned two classes of men do not find water, they can perform tayammum, i.e. wipe their faces and hands with pure dust before saying their Prayers.
In the case of the former two clauses no condition as to water is necessary. These two classes of men may resort to تیمم (tayammum) even if they find water. This is why the words, "and you are unclean" have been supplied after the words, if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression علی سفر (on a journey), in the present verse, is the same as the expression عابری سبیل (travelling along a way), both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing.
Finally, it must be noted that dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility, similarly, dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he was created (He created you from dust, 30:21). But the dust used must be pure, which is a necessary condition for the performance of Prayers. Any excess should be blown away before it is used in order to ensure just the minimum quantity for the performance of تیمم.
From the verse it is clear that though performing proper ablution is ordinarily necessary for Prayers yet, Islam being a perfect religion, one is allowed to substitute tayammum in place of ablution in certain exceptional cases.
609
Sukara is the plural of Sakaran which means, a person who is drunk; or is in a fit of anger; in raptures of love; is stricken with fear; or is overpowered by sleep or some other disturbing element which may distract his attention or obscure his reason, etc. (Lane).
610
The expression, "nor when you are unclean," means that just as a man cannot perform Prayers when he is not in full possession of his senses, similarly he cannot perform Prayers when he is unclean until he performs total ablution by bathing. Sexual intercourse creates a sort of uncleanness in the body which must be removed by bathing in order to ensure proper state of purity, cheerfulness, and vivacity necessary for worship.
611
The clause, except when you are travelling along a way, means that though ordinarily a person who is in a state of "uncleanness" cannot perform his Prayers except after proper bathing, yet if he becomes "unclean" when he is actually travelling on the way, bathing is not obligatory for him. He can in this case perform Tayammum as ordered in the concluding part of the verse.
612
Of the four classes, viz. the sick; those on a journey; those coming from the privy; and those having gone in unto their wives, only the last two, being in a state of uncleanness, need ablution or washing as the case may be, and if they do not find water, they can perform Tayammum. For the former two classes no condition as to water is necessary. They may resort to Tayammum even if they find water. This is why the words "while unclean" have been added after the words if you are ill or you are on a journey. It must be noted that the expression "on a journey" is the same as the expression "travelling along a way", both signifying the state of actual travelling when one is, as it were, on the wing. Dust has been chosen as a substitute for water because, just as water reminds a person of his origin (77:21), thus creating in him a sense of humility; similarly dust calls to his mind the other humble substance from which he is created (30:21).
اَیۡنَمَا تَکُوۡنُوۡا یُدۡرِککُّمُ الۡمَوۡتُ وَلَوۡ کُنۡتُمۡ فِیۡ بُرُوۡجٍ مُّشَیَّدَۃٍ ۗ وَاِنۡ تُصِبۡہُمۡ حَسَنَۃٌ یَّقُوۡلُوۡا ہٰذِہٖ مِنۡ عِنۡدِ اللّٰہِ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُصِبۡہُمۡ سَیِّئَۃٌ یَّقُوۡلُوۡا ہٰذِہٖ مِنۡ عِنۡدِکَ ۚ قُلۡ کُلٌّ مِّنۡ عِنۡدِ اللّٰہِ ۖ فَمَالِ ہٰٓؤُلَآءِ الۡقَوۡمِ لَا یَکَادُوۡنَ یَفۡقَہُوۡنَ حَدِیۡثًا
62:9.
62:9.
The words either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the Hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they could avoid death.
The expression, All is from Allah, is true in this sense that God is the Final Controlling Power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to a general law of nature or to one or other of His special decrees.
62:9.
Important Words:
مشیدة (strongly built) is derived from شاد meaning, he plastered (a wall, etc.) with the requisite material. شاد البناء means, he raised the building high. شادوا الدین means, they strengthened and exalted the religion. شیدہ means, he raised it high, namely, a place or a building; or he built it firmly and strongly and raised it high (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, Wheresoever you may be, death will overtake you, may either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, meaning that when one must die sooner or later, there is no reason why one should be so afraid of death as to refuse to fight in a just cause; or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they would be able to avoid death. The verse purports to say that God had decreed that they should suffer death and destruction, however well protected they might be.
It was customary with the hypocrites that when Muslims achieved a success, they attributed it to God, saying that since Islam was a divine religion, it was bound to prosper and succeed. But when a misfortune overtook Muslims, they declared that it was due to mistakes committed by the Prophet. The Quran says that from the viewpoint from which they ascribe success to God, failures are also ascribable to Him. By attributing success to God and failure to the Prophet, the hypocrites sought to discredit the Prophet and to lower him in the estimation of Muslims.
The words, Say, All is from Allah, point to the fact that both successes and misfortunes were foretold by the Holy Prophet (e.g. see 2:156-158). So even the failures which the hypocrites attributed to the Holy Prophet really constituted a proof of his truth. The expression, All is from Allah, is also true in this sense that God is the final controlling power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to the general law of nature ordained by God or to one or other of His special decrees.
e
62:9.
e
62:9.
547
Important Words:
مشیدة (strongly built) is derived from شاد meaning, he plastered (a wall, etc.) with the requisite material. شاد البناء means, he raised the building high. شادوا الدین means, they strengthened and exalted the religion. شیدہ means, he raised it high, namely, a place or a building; or he built it firmly and strongly and raised it high (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, Wheresoever you may be, death will overtake you, may either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, meaning that when one must die sooner or later, there is no reason why one should be so afraid of death as to refuse to fight in a just cause; or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they would be able to avoid death. The verse purports to say that God had decreed that they should suffer death and destruction, however well protected they might be.
It was customary with the hypocrites that when Muslims achieved a success, they attributed it to God, saying that since Islam was a divine religion, it was bound to prosper and succeed. But when a misfortune overtook Muslims, they declared that it was due to mistakes committed by the Prophet. The Quran says that from the viewpoint from which they ascribe success to God, failures are also ascribable to Him. By attributing success to God and failure to the Prophet, the hypocrites sought to discredit the Prophet and to lower him in the estimation of Muslims.
The words, Say, All is from Allah, point to the fact that both successes and misfortunes were foretold by the Holy Prophet (e.g. see 2:156-158). So even the failures which the hypocrites attributed to the Holy Prophet really constituted a proof of his truth. The expression, All is from Allah, is also true in this sense that God is the final controlling power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to the general law of nature ordained by God or to one or other of His special decrees.
a
62:9.
635
The words either refer to the general physical law about the inevitability of death, or they may be taken as particularly addressed to the Hypocrites, who disobeyed the Divine command to fight, thinking that in this way they could avoid death.
636
The expression, All is from Allah, is true in this sense that God is the Final Controlling Power in the universe and whatever good or evil befalls man is attributable either to a general law of nature or to one or other of His special decrees.
وَاِنِ امۡرَاَۃٌ خَافَتۡ مِنۡۢ بَعۡلِہَا نُشُوۡزًا اَوۡ اِعۡرَاضًا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَیۡہِمَاۤ اَنۡ یُّصۡلِحَا بَیۡنَہُمَا صُلۡحًا ۚ وَالصُّلۡحُ خَیۡرٌ ۗ وَاُحۡضِرَتِ الۡاَنۡفُسُ الشُّحَّ ۚ وَاِنۡ تُحۡسِنُوۡا وَتَتَّقُوۡا فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ خَبِیۡرًا
4:35.
یعنی عورت یہ دیکھ کر کہ معاملہ لمبا ہو جائے گا اور میری تکلیف ناقابل برداشت ہو جائے گی‘ اس لئے بہتر ہے کہ اپنے حق میں سے کچھ چھوڑ دوں۔ اگر قاضی دیکھے کہ ایسا کرنے میں حرج نہیں تو وہ اس کی اجازت دے سکتا ہے۔
یعنی لوگ بخل کی طرف مائل رہتے ہیں اور خرچ سے خواہ وہ مفید ہو پرہیز کرتے ہیں۔
4:35.
The words, it shall be no sin for them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
These words give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It is niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife.
4:35.
Commentary:
The words, it shall be no sin on them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
The words احضرت الانفس الشح (people are prone to covetousness) literally mean, "souls have been put face to face with covetousness." These words thus give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It may be expressed as niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife. When the husband does not like his wife, he thinks it a burden to support her. On the other hand, the wife sometimes makes excessive demands on her husband. The verse exhorts both to treat each other equitably and fairly.
The words, and reconciliation is best, embody an appeal to the married couple to live amicably and avoid disagreements; for that is in their own interest in all respects.
a
4:35.
3
یعنی عورت یہ دیکھ کر کہ معاملہ لمبا ہو جائے گا اور میری تکلیف ناقابل برداشت ہو جائے گی‘ اس لئے بہتر ہے کہ اپنے حق میں سے کچھ چھوڑ دوں۔ اگر قاضی دیکھے کہ ایسا کرنے میں حرج نہیں تو وہ اس کی اجازت دے سکتا ہے۔
4
یعنی لوگ بخل کی طرف مائل رہتے ہیں اور خرچ سے خواہ وہ مفید ہو پرہیز کرتے ہیں۔
a
4:35.
594
Commentary:
The words, it shall be no sin on them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
The words احضرت الانفس الشح (people are prone to covetousness) literally mean, "souls have been put face to face with covetousness." These words thus give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It may be expressed as niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife. When the husband does not like his wife, he thinks it a burden to support her. On the other hand, the wife sometimes makes excessive demands on her husband. The verse exhorts both to treat each other equitably and fairly.
The words, and reconciliation is best, embody an appeal to the married couple to live amicably and avoid disagreements; for that is in their own interest in all respects.
b
4:35.
678
The words, it shall be no sin for them that they be suitably reconciled to each other, constitute a peculiar Quranic expression denoting both exhortation and rebuke. They may be interpreted as something like this: "Do the contending parties think that they would be committing a sin if they became reconciled to each other? It is no sin to do so. On the contrary, it is a commendable thing."
679
These words give the real cause that often leads to estrangement between husband and wife. It is niggardliness on the part of the husband and covetousness on the part of the wife.
وَلَنۡ تَسۡتَطِیۡعُوۡۤا اَنۡ تَعۡدِلُوۡا بَیۡنَ النِّسَآءِ وَلَوۡ حَرَصۡتُمۡ ۖ فَلَا تَمِیۡلُوۡا کُلَّ الۡمَیۡلِ فَتَذَرُوۡہَا کَالۡمُعَلَّقَۃِ ۚ وَاِنۡ تُصۡلِحُوۡا وَتَتَّقُوۡا فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ غَفُوۡرًا رَّحِیۡمًا
یعنی ظاہری مساوات نہ کرنے کی صورت میں تعدد ازواج سے منع کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ نہ باطنی سلوک ایک سا ہوسکتا ہے نہ وہ موجب مناعی ہے۔
4:4.
2:232.
It is humanly impossible for a man to keep perfect balance between his wives in all respects; for instance love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly deal by them with equity in other respects, and this he must do. So acting equitably between one’s wives pertains only to such acts over which one has control. This is the interpretation the Holy Prophet himself put upon this verse.
4:4.
2:232.
Important Words:
معلقة (a thing suspended) is derived from علق. They say علقه i.e. he hung it up or suspended it. علق الامر means, he left the affair suspended, i.e. undecided. معلقه is, therefore, a woman whose husband neither keeps her properly as a wife nor divorces her so that she might marry another man (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, And you cannot keep perfect balance between wives, however much you may desire it, mean that it is not humanly possible for a man to keep perfect balance between his different wives in every respect. For instance, love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly treat them with equity in matters of money, time, etc., and this he must do. So acting equitably between the different wives, which has been laid down by Islam as an essential condition for polygamy, pertains only to such overt acts over which man has control. This is the interpretation which the Holy Prophet himself has put on this verse, both through his word and example. ‘A’ishah reports that the Holy Prophet used to treat his wives with equity in all matters over which man can have control and having done this, he used to pray to God, saying: "My Lord, these are my dealings in matters over which I have control; so blame me not for that which is in Thy power and not mine," meaning the feelings of the heart (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). The Holy Prophet is also reported to have said: "If a man has two wives and he is inclined to one of them (neglecting the other), he will rise on the Day of Resurrection with one of his sides having been torn off (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). Thus, both the example and the sayings of the Holy Prophet show that though a husband cannot love his wives equally, he should in his outward treatment, i.e. allotment of time, money, etc. be equally just and fair to all of them. In this connection see also 4:4.
b
4:4.
c
2:232.
350
一个丈夫要在几个妻子之间各方面都维持绝对公平的待遇, 那是非人力所能做到的事情; 例如, 爱情出于内心, 不是一个男人可以控制得了的, 不能指望一个丈夫同等地爱他所有的妻子。但他当然能在其他方面相等对待她们。这一点他必须做到。因此, 只要是在他能力范围以内的, 就得相等对待他所有的妻子。这是穆圣亲自对这节经文的解释。
5
یعنی ظاہری مساوات نہ کرنے کی صورت میں تعدد ازواج سے منع کیا گیا ہے۔ ورنہ نہ باطنی سلوک ایک سا ہوسکتا ہے نہ وہ موجب مناعی ہے۔
a
4:4.
b
2:232.
595
Important Words:
معلقة (a thing suspended) is derived from علق. They say علقه i.e. he hung it up or suspended it. علق الامر means, he left the affair suspended, i.e. undecided. معلقه is, therefore, a woman whose husband neither keeps her properly as a wife nor divorces her so that she might marry another man (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The words, And you cannot keep perfect balance between wives, however much you may desire it, mean that it is not humanly possible for a man to keep perfect balance between his different wives in every respect. For instance, love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly treat them with equity in matters of money, time, etc., and this he must do. So acting equitably between the different wives, which has been laid down by Islam as an essential condition for polygamy, pertains only to such overt acts over which man has control. This is the interpretation which the Holy Prophet himself has put on this verse, both through his word and example. ‘A’ishah reports that the Holy Prophet used to treat his wives with equity in all matters over which man can have control and having done this, he used to pray to God, saying: "My Lord, these are my dealings in matters over which I have control; so blame me not for that which is in Thy power and not mine," meaning the feelings of the heart (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). The Holy Prophet is also reported to have said: "If a man has two wives and he is inclined to one of them (neglecting the other), he will rise on the Day of Resurrection with one of his sides having been torn off (Dawud, ch. on Nikah). Thus, both the example and the sayings of the Holy Prophet show that though a husband cannot love his wives equally, he should in his outward treatment, i.e. allotment of time, money, etc. be equally just and fair to all of them. In this connection see also 4:4.
a
4:4.
b
2:232.
680
It is humanly impossible for a man to keep perfect balance between his wives in all respects; for instance love being an affair of the heart over which man has no control, a husband cannot be expected to have equal love for all his wives. But he can certainly deal by them with equity in other respects, and this he must do. So acting equitably between one’s wives pertains only to such acts over which one has control. This is the interpretation the Holy Prophet himself put upon this verse.
وَاِنۡ یَّتَفَرَّقَا یُغۡنِ اللّٰہُ کُلًّا مِّنۡ سَعَتِہٖ ۚ وَکَانَ اللّٰہُ وٰسِعًا حَکِیۡمًا
如果丈夫和妻子虽然竭尽全力想和睦相处, 但实在觉得难以生活在一起, 非要离异不可, 安拉答应给双方更合适的配偶。可是根据 «古兰经», 离婚是 “在所有允许的事情中, 是安拉最不愿见到的” (دَاؤُدْ كِتَابُ الطَّلَاق, Da’ud, Kitabut-Talaq)。
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their utmost to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties more suitable matches. But according to Islam divorce is "Of all permissible things most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
Commentary:
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their best to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties out of His beneficence, i.e. they may find other and more suitable matches. How Islam looks upon divorce is vividly portrayed in a well-known hadith of the Holy Prophet, viz. "Of all permissible things divorce is most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
351
如果丈夫和妻子虽然竭尽全力想和睦相处, 但实在觉得难以生活在一起, 非要离异不可, 安拉答应给双方更合适的配偶。可是根据 «古兰经», 离婚是 “在所有允许的事情中, 是安拉最不愿见到的” (دَاؤُدْ كِتَابُ الطَّلَاق, Da’ud, Kitabut-Talaq)。
596
Commentary:
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their best to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties out of His beneficence, i.e. they may find other and more suitable matches. How Islam looks upon divorce is vividly portrayed in a well-known hadith of the Holy Prophet, viz. "Of all permissible things divorce is most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
681
If, in spite of the husband and the wife having done their utmost to live amicably, they find that they cannot pull on together, and separation takes place, then God promises to provide for both parties more suitable matches. But according to Islam divorce is "Of all permissible things most hateful in the eyes of God" (Dawud, ch. on Talaq).
وَلِلّٰہِ مَا فِی السَّمٰوٰتِ وَمَا فِی الۡاَرۡضِ ۗ وَلَقَدۡ وَصَّیۡنَا الَّذِیۡنَ اُوۡتُوا الۡکِتٰبَ مِنۡ قَبۡلِکُمۡ وَاِیَّاکُمۡ اَنِ اتَّقُوا اللّٰہَ ۚ وَاِنۡ تَکۡفُرُوۡا فَاِنَّ لِلّٰہِ مَا فِی السَّمٰوٰتِ وَمَا فِی الۡاَرۡضِ ۚ وَکَانَ اللّٰہُ غَنِیًّا حَمِیۡدًا
See 4:127.
42:14.
See 4:127.
42:14.
Important Words:
حمید (Praiseworthy) is derived from حمد which means, he praised or eulogized him; or he praised him for something depending on the latter’s will. Thus the describing of a pearl as lustrous is not حمد but مدح (see also 1:2). حمید or محمود with which it is almost synonymous, means, praised, eulogized or commended; praise-worthy or laudable. الحمید which is one of the names of God, means, He Who is praised or is praiseworthy in every case (Lane).
Commentary:
See the next verse.
a
4:127.
b
42:14.
a
See 4:127.
b
42:14.
597
Important Words:
حمید (Praiseworthy) is derived from حمد which means, he praised or eulogized him; or he praised him for something depending on the latter’s will. Thus the describing of a pearl as lustrous is not حمد but مدح (see also 1:2). حمید or محمود with which it is almost synonymous, means, praised, eulogized or commended; praise-worthy or laudable. الحمید which is one of the names of God, means, He Who is praised or is praiseworthy in every case (Lane).
Commentary:
See the next verse.
c
See 4:127.
d
42:14.
۞ یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا کُوۡنُوۡا قَوّٰمِیۡنَ بِالۡقِسۡطِ شُہَدَآءَ لِلّٰہِ وَلَوۡ عَلٰۤی اَنۡفُسِکُمۡ اَوِ الۡوٰلِدَیۡنِ وَالۡاَقۡرَبِیۡنَ ۚ اِنۡ یَّکُنۡ غَنِیًّا اَوۡ فَقِیۡرًا فَاللّٰہُ اَوۡلٰی بِہِمَا ۖ فَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا الۡہَوٰۤی اَنۡ تَعۡدِلُوۡا ۚ وَاِنۡ تَلۡوٗۤا اَوۡ تُعۡرِضُوۡا فَاِنَّ اللّٰہَ کَانَ بِمَا تَعۡمَلُوۡنَ خَبِیۡرًا
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
5:9.
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
5:9.
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
e
5:9.
352
“不利于你们自己” 这一用语, 也可意指 “不利于你们的宗教或亲戚朋友。” “父母和亲戚” 这几个字, 是加上去强调这一旨令的。
1
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
a
5:9.
600
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
c
5:9.
682
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
682A
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
اَلَّذِیۡنَ یَتَرَبَّصُوۡنَ بِکُمۡ فَاِنۡ کَانَ لَکُمۡ فَتۡحٌ مِّنَ اللّٰہِ قَالُوۡۤا اَلَمۡ نَکُنۡ مَّعَکُمۡ وَاِنۡ کَانَ لِلۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ نَصِیۡبٌ قَالُوۡۤا اَلَمۡ نَسۡتَحۡوِذۡ عَلَیۡکُمۡ وَنَمۡنَعۡکُمۡ مِّنَ الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ ۚ فَاللّٰہُ یَحۡکُمُ بَیۡنَکُمۡ یَوۡمَ الۡقِیٰمَۃِ ۗ وَلَنۡ یَّجۡعَلَ اللّٰہُ لِلۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ عَلَی الۡمُؤۡمِنِیۡنَ سَبِیۡلًا
9:98; 57:15.
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
9:98; 57:15.
9:98; 57:15.
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
a
9:98; 57:15.
1
یعنی اس سے پہلے ایک موقع پر کیا مسلمان غالب نہیں آگئے تھے۔ جو ہماری ہی فتح تھی۔ مگر ہم نے ان سے سفارشیں کرکے تم کو بچا لیا۔
a
9:98; 57:15.
605
Important Words:
نستحوذ علیکم (get the better of you). نستحوذ is derived from حاذ. They say حاذہ i.e. he guarded or protected it and took care of it. حاذ الابل means, he drove the camels quickly or he gained mastery over the camels and collected them together. استحوذ علیهmeans, he overcame or mastered or gained mastery of him or it; he got the better of him or it (Taj).
نمنعکم (protected you) is derived from منع i.e. (1) he prevented or hindered: (2) he denied or refused (3) he protected or guarded (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, did we not get the better of you, are addressed by the hypocrites to the disbelievers and mean "we had you in our power but we spared you". Similarly, the words, and protect you against the believers, may be interpreted something like this: "We separated ourselves from the Muslims with the result that they became weak and you were thus saved from them." Or the words may mean, "some of the faint-hearted among you wished to make peace with the Muslims, but we prevented them from doing so, and now the result is that you are victorious." In the latter case the clause نمنعکم من المؤمنینwould be translated as "we prevented you from making peace with the believers".
The last sentence of the verse means that the hypocrites will never be able to bring a valid objection against Muslims.
b
9:98; 57:15.
وَاِنۡ مِّنۡ اَہۡلِ الۡکِتٰبِ اِلَّا لَیُؤۡمِنَنَّ بِہٖ قَبۡلَ مَوۡتِہٖ ۖ وَیَوۡمَ الۡقِیٰمَۃِ یَکُوۡنُ عَلَیۡہِمۡ شَہِیۡدًا
مفسرین اس آیت کے یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ تمام اہل کتاب مسیحؑ کی موت سے پہلے اس پر ایمان لے آئیں گے۔ لیکن یہ معنے درست نہیں کیونکہ یہاں اِنْ مِّنْ اَھْلِ الْکِتَابِ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بتاتے ہیں کہ اہل کتاب میں سے ہر فرد کا ایمان لانا ضروری ہے۔ حالانکہ لاکھوں یہودی ایسے ہیں جو مسیحؑ کے زمانہ سے اب تک فوت ہو چکے ہیں لیکن ان کو مسیحؑ پر ایمان لانا نصیب نہیں ہوا۔ پس ہم نے اس آیت کا ترجمہ یہ کیا ہے کہ اہل کتاب میں سے ہر ایک (یعنی یہودی اور مسیحی) اپنی موت سے پہلے پہلے یہ مانتا رہے گا کہ مسیح صلیب پر مر گئے ہیں۔ یہودی اس لئے کہ وہ مسیحؑ کو لعنتی ثابت کرنا چاہتے ہیں اور عیسائی اس
5:118.
The pronoun "his" in the expression "before his death" stands for the noun "none", meaning every one among the People of the Book before his own death……This meaning is supported by the second reading of Mautihi which is Mautihim (their death) as reported by Ubayy (Jarir, vi. 13). The Jews believe that they killed Jesus on the cross because they seek to prove that he was not a true Prophet. The Christians believe that he had died on the cross, and this is because they have adopted the doctrine of Atonement.
5:118.
Important Words:
The pronoun "it" in the clause, believe in it, stands for the false belief (referred to in the preceding verses) that Jesus met his death on the cross. So the verse signifies that both Jews and Christians will continue to believe in the supposed crucifixion of Jesus till the time of their death, when the veil will be lifted and everything will become clear. They are indeed bound to believe in the alleged death of Jesus on the cross. If the Jews do not do so, his truth becomes established and their whole position becomes indefensible. Similarly, if the Christians do not believe in it, the doctrine of Atonement becomes untenable and the entire fabric of Christianity crashes to pieces. So both these peoples go on sticking to this absurd and unfounded belief in the face of all reason and all established facts of history.
The attempts to make the words لیؤمنن به قبل موته (will believe in it before his death) mean "will believe in him (Jesus) before his (Jesus’) death" is simply ridiculous. The context spurns the idea, as does the second reading of the expression موته (his death) viz. موتھم (their death) reported by Ubayy (Jarir, vi. 13).
a
5:118.
361
“他死以前” 这一用语中的代词 “他的” 代表名词 “没有一个人”, 意指每一个有经的人在他自己死以前……。按乌巴耶 (اُبَیّ, Ubayy) 的说法 (Jarir. vi. 13) 这个意思可由 مَوْتِه (Mautihi) 的第二个版本 مَوْتِهِمْ (Mautihim) (他们的死) 得到证实。犹太人相信他们已在十字架上杀死了伊撒, 因为他们力图证明他不是真正的先知。基督教徒相信他已死在十字架上, 因为他们接受了伊撒(耶稣)替世人赎罪而受难及死的这一教义。
5
مفسرین اس آیت کے یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ تمام اہل کتاب مسیحؑ کی موت سے پہلے اس پر ایمان لے آئیں گے۔ لیکن یہ معنے درست نہیں کیونکہ یہاں اِنْ مِّنْ اَھْلِ الْکِتَابِ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بتاتے ہیں کہ اہل کتاب میں سے ہر فرد کا ایمان لانا ضروری ہے۔ حالانکہ لاکھوں یہودی ایسے ہیں جو مسیحؑ کے زمانہ سے اب تک فوت ہو چکے ہیں لیکن ان کو مسیحؑ پر ایمان لانا نصیب نہیں ہوا۔ پس ہم نے اس آیت کا ترجمہ یہ کیا ہے کہ اہل کتاب میں سے ہر ایک (یعنی یہودی اور مسیحی) اپنی موت سے پہلے پہلے یہ مانتا رہے گا کہ مسیح صلیب پر مر گئے ہیں۔ یہودی اس لئے کہ وہ مسیحؑ کو لعنتی ثابت کرنا چاہتے ہیں اور عیسائی اس
b
5:118.
623
Important Words:
The pronoun "it" in the clause, believe in it, stands for the false belief (referred to in the preceding verses) that Jesus met his death on the cross. So the verse signifies that both Jews and Christians will continue to believe in the supposed crucifixion of Jesus till the time of their death, when the veil will be lifted and everything will become clear. They are indeed bound to believe in the alleged death of Jesus on the cross. If the Jews do not do so, his truth becomes established and their whole position becomes indefensible. Similarly, if the Christians do not believe in it, the doctrine of Atonement becomes untenable and the entire fabric of Christianity crashes to pieces. So both these peoples go on sticking to this absurd and unfounded belief in the face of all reason and all established facts of history.
The attempts to make the words لیؤمنن به قبل موته (will believe in it before his death) mean "will believe in him (Jesus) before his (Jesus’) death" is simply ridiculous. The context spurns the idea, as does the second reading of the expression موته (his death) viz. موتھم (their death) reported by Ubayy (Jarir, vi. 13).
b
5:118.
701
The pronoun "his" in the expression "before his death" stands for the noun "none", meaning every one among the People of the Book before his own death……This meaning is supported by the second reading of Mautihi which is Mautihim (their death) as reported by Ubayy (Jarir, vi. 13). The Jews believe that they killed Jesus on the cross because they seek to prove that he was not a true Prophet. The Christians believe that he had died on the cross, and this is because they have adopted the doctrine of Atonement.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا النَّاسُ قَدۡ جَآءَکُمُ الرَّسُوۡلُ بِالۡحَقِّ مِنۡ رَّبِّکُمۡ فَاٰمِنُوۡا خَیۡرًا لَّکُمۡ ۚ وَاِنۡ تَکۡفُرُوۡا فَاِنَّ لِلّٰہِ مَا فِی السَّمٰوٰتِ وَالۡاَرۡضِ ۚ وَکَانَ اللّٰہُ عَلِیۡمًا حَکِیۡمًا
اَلْ کا ترجمہ ’’یہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔
Commentary:
The words, to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and in the earth, have been added to point out that in case of disbelief the disbelievers cannot harm God or His religion. It is only themselves that they would harm.
1
اَلْ کا ترجمہ ’’یہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔
634
Commentary:
The words, to Allah belongs whatever is in the heavens and in the earth, have been added to point out that in case of disbelief the disbelievers cannot harm God or His religion. It is only themselves that they would harm.
یَسۡتَفۡتُوۡنَکَ قُلِ اللّٰہُ یُفۡتِیۡکُمۡ فِی الۡکَلٰلَۃِ ۚ اِنِ امۡرُؤٌا ہَلَکَ لَیۡسَ لَہٗ وَلَدٌ وَّلَہٗۤ اُخۡتٌ فَلَہَا نِصۡفُ مَا تَرَکَ ۚ وَہُوَ یَرِثُہَاۤ اِنۡ لَّمۡ یَکُنۡ لَّہَا وَلَدٌ ۚ فَاِنۡ کَانَتَا اثۡنَتَیۡنِ فَلَہُمَا الثُّلُثَانِ مِمَّا تَرَکَ ۚ وَاِنۡ کَانُوۡۤا اِخۡوَۃً رِّجَالًا وَّنِسَآءً فَلِلذَّکَرِ مِثۡلُ حَظِّ الۡاُنۡثَیَیۡنِ ۗ یُبَیِّنُ اللّٰہُ لَکُمۡ اَنۡ تَضِلُّوۡا ۗ وَاللّٰہُ بِکُلِّ شَیۡءٍ عَلِیۡمٌۢ
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
4:13.
4:12.
4:27.
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
e
4:13.
367
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
1
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
a
4:13.
b
4:12.
c
4:27.
639
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
c
4:13.
715
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡۤا اِذَا قُمۡتُمۡ اِلَی الصَّلٰوۃِ فَاغۡسِلُوۡا وُجُوۡہَکُمۡ وَاَیۡدِیَکُمۡ اِلَی الۡمَرَافِقِ وَامۡسَحُوۡا بِرُءُوۡسِکُمۡ وَاَرۡجُلَکُمۡ اِلَی الۡکَعۡبَیۡنِ ۚ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ جُنُبًا فَاطَّہَّرُوۡا ۚ وَاِنۡ کُنۡتُمۡ مَّرۡضٰۤی اَوۡ عَلٰی سَفَرٍ اَوۡ جَآءَ اَحَدٌ مِّنۡکُمۡ مِّنَ الۡغَآئِطِ اَوۡ لٰمَسۡتُمُ النِّسَآءَ فَلَمۡ تَجِدُوۡا مَآءً فَتَیَمَّمُوۡا صَعِیۡدًا طَیِّبًا فَامۡسَحُوۡا بِوُجُوۡہِکُمۡ وَاَیۡدِیۡکُمۡ مِّنۡہُ ۚ مَا یُرِیۡدُ اللّٰہُ لِیَجۡعَلَ عَلَیۡکُمۡ مِّنۡ حَرَجٍ وَّلٰکِنۡ یُّرِیۡدُ لِیُطَہِّرَکُمۡ وَلِیُتِمَّ نِعۡمَتَہٗ عَلَیۡکُمۡ لَعَلَّکُمۡ تَشۡکُرُوۡنَ
2:186; 2:287.
اس کی وضاحت کے لئے دیکھئے نوٹ سورہ نساء آیت۴۴۔
2:186; 2:287.
The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word Arjula (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words Wujuha (faces) and Aidiya (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb "wash" and not by the particle ba’ (over) which governs the word Ru’us (heads) only.
See {610} - {612}.
2:186.
Important Words:
جنب (unclean) for which see 4:44.
Commentary:
After the questions of food and marriage comes the question of cleanliness on which Islam lays so much emphasis, specially on cleanliness necessary for the proper performance of worship. The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended, as alleged by the Shias, to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word ارجل (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words وجوه (faces) and ایدی (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb اغسلوا (wash) and not by the particle با (over) which governs the word رؤس (heads) only. Hence the addition of the verb "wash" before it in the translation. It is true that a solitary reading gives the word ارجل(arjula) as ارجل (arjulin in the genitive case). But even this does not necessarily mean that the word is not governed by the verb اغسلوا (wash); for, according to the rules of Arabic grammar, nouns in the accusative case may sometimes be put in the genitive case owing to their proximity to a noun in the genitive case. According to this rule, ارجل (feet) would be taken to have been put in this reading in the genitive case owing to its proximity to the word رؤس (heads), but really it is governed not by the preposition با but by the verb اغسلوا. In fact, the word ارجل (feet) has been put after رؤس (heads) to point out the order which is to be observed in the performance of ablution. The authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet also make it clear that in performing an ablution the feet should be washed and not merely wiped. These sayings are also supported by the practice of the Holy Prophet.
There are, however, cases when the feet are not to be washed but simply "wiped" like the heads, e.g., when one is wearing socks or stockings. So it may be that the common reading arjula (in the accusative case) applies to the general rule of "washing" the feet when performing وضوء (ablution), while the exceptional reading arjuli (in the genitive case) applies to the exceptional cases when the feet are to be "wiped" like the head.
The words, you have touched women, embody a chaste and graceful expression and mean "you have had sexual intercourse with them".
The sense of the verse may be summed up as follows: (1) Before offering his Prayers, a Muslim should perform the prescribed ablution, i.e.washing of the face and the hands, wiping of the head, and washing of the feet. (2) If a man is جنب (unclean), i.e. he has had sexual intercourse with his wife or, for that matter, has had a nocturnal discharge, he should have a complete bath in order to purify himself for Prayers. (3) If, however, a man is sick and the process of ablution or bathing is likely to do him harm, or if he is on a journey and cannot find water, then even after answering the call of nature or becoming "unclean" by having sexual intercourse with his wife, he is allowed to forego the process of ablution or bathing and to perform instead the تیمم with pure dust. See also 4:44.
a
2:186; 2:287.
3
اس کی وضاحت کے لئے دیکھئے نوٹ سورہ نساء آیت۴۴۔
a
2:186.
646
Important Words:
جنب (unclean) for which see 4:44.
Commentary:
After the questions of food and marriage comes the question of cleanliness on which Islam lays so much emphasis, specially on cleanliness necessary for the proper performance of worship. The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended, as alleged by the Shias, to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word ارجل (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words وجوه (faces) and ایدی (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb اغسلوا (wash) and not by the particle با (over) which governs the word رؤس (heads) only. Hence the addition of the verb "wash" before it in the translation. It is true that a solitary reading gives the word ارجل(arjula) as ارجل (arjulin in the genitive case). But even this does not necessarily mean that the word is not governed by the verb اغسلوا (wash); for, according to the rules of Arabic grammar, nouns in the accusative case may sometimes be put in the genitive case owing to their proximity to a noun in the genitive case. According to this rule, ارجل (feet) would be taken to have been put in this reading in the genitive case owing to its proximity to the word رؤس (heads), but really it is governed not by the preposition با but by the verb اغسلوا. In fact, the word ارجل (feet) has been put after رؤس (heads) to point out the order which is to be observed in the performance of ablution. The authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet also make it clear that in performing an ablution the feet should be washed and not merely wiped. These sayings are also supported by the practice of the Holy Prophet.
There are, however, cases when the feet are not to be washed but simply "wiped" like the heads, e.g., when one is wearing socks or stockings. So it may be that the common reading arjula (in the accusative case) applies to the general rule of "washing" the feet when performing وضوء (ablution), while the exceptional reading arjuli (in the genitive case) applies to the exceptional cases when the feet are to be "wiped" like the head.
The words, you have touched women, embody a chaste and graceful expression and mean "you have had sexual intercourse with them".
The sense of the verse may be summed up as follows: (1) Before offering his Prayers, a Muslim should perform the prescribed ablution, i.e.washing of the face and the hands, wiping of the head, and washing of the feet. (2) If a man is جنب (unclean), i.e. he has had sexual intercourse with his wife or, for that matter, has had a nocturnal discharge, he should have a complete bath in order to purify himself for Prayers. (3) If, however, a man is sick and the process of ablution or bathing is likely to do him harm, or if he is on a journey and cannot find water, then even after answering the call of nature or becoming "unclean" by having sexual intercourse with his wife, he is allowed to forego the process of ablution or bathing and to perform instead the تیمم with pure dust. See also 4:44.
a
2:186; 2:287.
725
The feet are here mentioned after the head, not because they are intended to be only wiped like the head, but because they come last in the process of ablution. This is apparent from the fact that the word Arjula (feet) has been put in the accusative case in the standard text, like the words Wujuha (faces) and Aidiya (hands), thus showing that, like the latter, the word "feet" is also governed in the accusative case by the verb "wash" and not by the particle ba’ (over) which governs the word Ru’us (heads) only.
725A
See {610} - {612}.
سَاَصۡرِفُ عَنۡ اٰیٰتِیَ الَّذِیۡنَ یَتَکَبَّرُوۡنَ فِی الۡاَرۡضِ بِغَیۡرِ الۡحَقِّ وَاِنۡ یَّرَوۡا کُلَّ اٰیَۃٍ لَّا یُؤۡمِنُوۡا بِہَا وَاِنۡ یَّرَوۡا سَبِیۡلَ الرُّشۡدِ لَا یَتَّخِذُوۡہُ سَبِیۡلًا وَّاِنۡ یَّرَوۡا سَبِیۡلَ الۡغَیِّ یَتَّخِذُوۡہُ سَبِیۡلًا ۚ ذٰلِکَ بِاَنَّہُمۡ کَذَّبُوۡا بِاٰیٰتِنَا وَکَانُوۡا عَنۡہَا غٰفِلِیۡنَ
6:26.
6:26.
6:26.
Commentary:
This verse explains the true significance of the word دار (abode) occurring in the sentence, I shall show you the abode of the transgressors, contained in the preceding verse.
a
6:26.
a
6:26.
1036
Commentary:
This verse explains the true significance of the word دار (abode) occurring in the sentence, I shall show you the abode of the transgressors, contained in the preceding verse.
b
6:26.
۞ یٰۤاَیُّہَا الرَّسُوۡلُ لَا یَحۡزُنۡکَ الَّذِیۡنَ یُسٰرِعُوۡنَ فِی الۡکُفۡرِ مِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ قَالُوۡۤا اٰمَنَّا بِاَفۡوٰہِہِمۡ وَلَمۡ تُؤۡمِنۡ قُلُوۡبُہُمۡ ۛ وَمِنَ الَّذِیۡنَ ہَادُوۡا ۛ سَمّٰعُوۡنَ لِلۡکَذِبِ سَمّٰعُوۡنَ لِقَوۡمٍ اٰخَرِیۡنَ لَمۡ یَاۡتُوۡکَ ۖ یُحَرِّفُوۡنَ الۡکَلِمَ مِنۡۢ بَعۡدِ مَوَاضِعِہٖ ۖ یَقُوۡلُوۡنَ اِنۡ اُوۡتِیۡتُمۡ ہٰذَا فَخُذُوۡہُ وَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تُؤۡتَوۡہُ فَاحۡذَرُوۡا ۚ وَمَنۡ یُّرِدِ اللّٰہُ فِتۡنَتَہٗ فَلَنۡ تَمۡلِکَ لَہٗ مِنَ اللّٰہِ شَیۡـًٔا ۚ اُولٰٓئِکَ الَّذِیۡنَ لَمۡ یُرِدِ اللّٰہُ اَنۡ یُّطَہِّرَ قُلُوۡبَہُمۡ ۚ لَہُمۡ فِی الدُّنۡیَا خِزۡیٌ ۖ وَّلَہُمۡ فِی الۡاٰخِرَۃِ عَذَابٌ عَظِیۡمٌ
یعنی قرآن کریم آکر سنتے ہیں۔ پھر اس کا غلط مفہوم لوگوں میں پھیلاتے ہیں تا لوگ مسلمانوں پر اعتراض کریں۔
9:47.
2:76; 3:79; 4:47.
The expression may also mean, (1) they listen in order to lie; (2) they accept as true the lies which others utter about the Holy Prophet.
9:47.
2:76; 3:79; 4:47.
Commentary:
The expression سماعون للکذب (who would fondly listen to any lie) is capable of bearing two meanings: (1) they listen to you in order to lie, i.e. they come to you so that they may listen to your words, and then go out and distort and twist your words and their meanings before their own people and ascribe to you things which you did not say or mean; (2) they hearken to lies and accept them, i.e. they believe the lies which others utter about you and accept them as true. Similarly, the clause سماعون لقوم آخرین (who listen for conveying it to another people) means: (1) they listen (to you) for the sake of another people; i.e. they come and listen to what you say in order to report it to another people; (2) they believe what others say about you and take it as true.
c
9:47.
d
2:76; 3:79; 4:47.
1
یعنی قرآن کریم آکر سنتے ہیں۔ پھر اس کا غلط مفہوم لوگوں میں پھیلاتے ہیں تا لوگ مسلمانوں پر اعتراض کریں۔
a
9:47.
b
2:76; 3:79; 4:47.
673
Commentary:
The expression سماعون للکذب (who would fondly listen to any lie) is capable of bearing two meanings: (1) they listen to you in order to lie, i.e. they come to you so that they may listen to your words, and then go out and distort and twist your words and their meanings before their own people and ascribe to you things which you did not say or mean; (2) they hearken to lies and accept them, i.e. they believe the lies which others utter about you and accept them as true. Similarly, the clause سماعون لقوم آخرین (who listen for conveying it to another people) means: (1) they listen (to you) for the sake of another people; i.e. they come and listen to what you say in order to report it to another people; (2) they believe what others say about you and take it as true.
a
9:47.
b
2:76; 3:79; 4:47.
746
The expression may also mean, (1) they listen in order to lie; (2) they accept as true the lies which others utter about the Holy Prophet.
سَمّٰعُوۡنَ لِلۡکَذِبِ اَکّٰلُوۡنَ لِلسُّحۡتِ ۚ فَاِنۡ جَآءُوۡکَ فَاحۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ اَوۡ اَعۡرِضۡ عَنۡہُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ تُعۡرِضۡ عَنۡہُمۡ فَلَنۡ یَّضُرُّوۡکَ شَیۡـًٔا ۖ وَّاِنۡ حَکَمۡتَ فَاحۡکُمۡ بَیۡنَہُمۡ بِالۡقِسۡطِ ۚ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ یُحِبُّ الۡمُقۡسِطِیۡنَ
5:63, 64.
5:63, 64.
Suht means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
5:63, 64.
Important Words:
السحت (things forbidden) is the noun-infinitive from سحت. They say سحته i.e. he extirpated or destroyed it utterly. سحت شعرهmeans, he removed his hair utterly (in shaving and cutting). سحت فی تجارته means, he earned foul or unlawful gain in his trade. An Arab would say ماله سحت i.e. his property may be destroyed with impunity. سحت therefore means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; anything little or small in quantity or number; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
Commentary:
The words اکالون للسحت mean: (1) that the Jews devour things that are forbidden and unlawful; or (2) they devour things the result of which is spiritual ruin and national destruction; or (3) they do not hesitate to take paltry and mean things unlawfully; or (4) they accept bribes. For an explanation of the words سماعون للکذب see the previous verse.
a
5:63, 64.
a
5:63, 64.
674
Important Words:
السحت (things forbidden) is the noun-infinitive from سحت. They say سحته i.e. he extirpated or destroyed it utterly. سحت شعرهmeans, he removed his hair utterly (in shaving and cutting). سحت فی تجارته means, he earned foul or unlawful gain in his trade. An Arab would say ماله سحت i.e. his property may be destroyed with impunity. سحت therefore means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; anything little or small in quantity or number; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
Commentary:
The words اکالون للسحت mean: (1) that the Jews devour things that are forbidden and unlawful; or (2) they devour things the result of which is spiritual ruin and national destruction; or (3) they do not hesitate to take paltry and mean things unlawfully; or (4) they accept bribes. For an explanation of the words سماعون للکذب see the previous verse.
c
5:63, 64.
747
Suht means, a thing which is forbidden or unlawful; that which is foul and of bad repute; a bribe that is given to a judge or the like; or anything paltry, mean and inconsiderable (Lane).
۞ یٰۤاَیُّہَا الرَّسُوۡلُ بَلِّغۡ مَاۤ اُنۡزِلَ اِلَیۡکَ مِنۡ رَّبِّکَ ۖ وَاِنۡ لَّمۡ تَفۡعَلۡ فَمَا بَلَّغۡتَ رِسَالَتَہٗ ۚ وَاللّٰہُ یَعۡصِمُکَ مِنَ النَّاسِ ۗ اِنَّ اللّٰہَ لَا یَہۡدِی الۡقَوۡمَ الۡکٰفِرِیۡنَ
6:20.
The words do not indicate any remissness on the part of the Holy Prophet to convey the Divine Message. They only state a general principle that anyone who fails to convey a part of the message he is entrusted with, in fact, fails to deliver it at all.
The expression means that God will not suffer the disbelievers to take the life of the Holy Prophet or disable him permanently so as to render him unfit to discharge his duty.
6:20.
Commentary:
There is much difference of opinion about the time when this verse, containing a promise of God to protect the Holy Prophet against his enemies, was revealed. Ibn Jarir, Ibn Kathir, Durr-e-Manthur and Al-Bahrul-Muhit mention a large number of narrators who report that the verse was revealed at Mecca. There are certain others, however, according to whom the verse was revealed at Medina. The author of the Ruhul-Ma‘ani says, the verse was first revealed at Mecca, and was revealed again at Medina, and this seems to be the correct view. In fact, it appears to have been revealed four or five times.
The words, if thou do it not, thou hast not conveyed His message, do not signify apprehension that the Holy Prophet was going to be remiss in his duty. They have been simply used to express the general principle that he who fails to convey part of his message, in fact, fails to deliver the message at all.
The expression لایھدی (guides not) is not used here in the sense of "not showing the way to truth", for occurring directly after the command to deliver the message of God to the people it cannot mean that God will not guide disbelievers to truth. If they were not to be guided to the right path, what was the sense in commanding the Prophet to deliver God’s Message to them? The expression is, therefore, used here not in the spiritual but in the physical sense. Occurring immediately after the Divine promise of protection to the Holy Prophet, the expression لایھدی means that God will not allow disbelievers to devise means of successfully harming him; and that they will not be guided to come near him and kill him. It must, however, be remembered that the Divine promise regarding the protection of the Holy Prophet did not mean that his enemies would not be allowed to do him any physical harm whatsoever. It only means that they would not be permitted to take his life or disable him permanently so as to render him unfit for his work.
e
6:20.
385
这句话并不指在穆圣方面有什么粗心大意而没有传达安拉的使命的地方; 只是说了一个总的原则: 如果任何人没能传达他受托的一部分使命的话, 实际上他没能传达全部使命。
b
6:20.
698
Commentary:
There is much difference of opinion about the time when this verse, containing a promise of God to protect the Holy Prophet against his enemies, was revealed. Ibn Jarir, Ibn Kathir, Durr-e-Manthur and Al-Bahrul-Muhit mention a large number of narrators who report that the verse was revealed at Mecca. There are certain others, however, according to whom the verse was revealed at Medina. The author of the Ruhul-Ma‘ani says, the verse was first revealed at Mecca, and was revealed again at Medina, and this seems to be the correct view. In fact, it appears to have been revealed four or five times.
The words, if thou do it not, thou hast not conveyed His message, do not signify apprehension that the Holy Prophet was going to be remiss in his duty. They have been simply used to express the general principle that he who fails to convey part of his message, in fact, fails to deliver the message at all.
The expression لایھدی (guides not) is not used here in the sense of "not showing the way to truth", for occurring directly after the command to deliver the message of God to the people it cannot mean that God will not guide disbelievers to truth. If they were not to be guided to the right path, what was the sense in commanding the Prophet to deliver God’s Message to them? The expression is, therefore, used here not in the spiritual but in the physical sense. Occurring immediately after the Divine promise of protection to the Holy Prophet, the expression لایھدی means that God will not allow disbelievers to devise means of successfully harming him; and that they will not be guided to come near him and kill him. It must, however, be remembered that the Divine promise regarding the protection of the Holy Prophet did not mean that his enemies would not be allowed to do him any physical harm whatsoever. It only means that they would not be permitted to take his life or disable him permanently so as to render him unfit for his work.
b
6:20.
772
The words do not indicate any remissness on the part of the Holy Prophet to convey the Divine Message. They only state a general principle that anyone who fails to convey a part of the message he is entrusted with, in fact, fails to deliver it at all.
773
The expression means that God will not suffer the disbelievers to take the life of the Holy Prophet or disable him permanently so as to render him unfit to discharge his duty.
لَّقَدۡ کَفَرَ الَّذِیۡنَ قَالُوۡۤا اِنَّ اللّٰہَ ثَالِثُ ثَلٰثَۃٍ ۘ وَمَا مِنۡ اِلٰہٍ اِلَّاۤ اِلٰہٌ وّٰحِدٌ ۚ وَاِنۡ لَّمۡ یَنۡتَہُوۡا عَمَّا یَقُوۡلُوۡنَ لَیَمَسَّنَّ الَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡا مِنۡہُمۡ عَذَابٌ اَلِیۡمٌ
4:172.
The reference in this verse is to the doctrine of Trinity, that mysterious and abstruse dogma of the three persons of Godhead—the Father, the Son and the Holy Ghost—coexisting and co-equal in all respects, combining to make one God and yet remaining three. It was the Nicene Council and especially the Athanasian Creed that first gave the dogma its definite shape. The doctrine forms the basic article of the Christian Faith.
4:172.
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to the doctrine of Trinity, that mysterious and abstruse dogma of the three persons of Godhead—Father, Son and Holy Ghost—co-existing and co-equal in all respects, combining to make one God and yet remaining three. It was the Nicene Council and especially the Athenasian Creed that first gave the dogma its definite shape. The doctrine forms the basic Article of the Christian Faith. What a fall for the enlightened West!
c
4:172.
387
这节经文所叙述的是 “三位一体” 的教义, 即圣父、圣子和圣灵--------三位同时存在并在一切方面都相互等同, 结合成为一个安拉, 但仍然是三位的那一神秘难解的教义。第一个定出这一具体教义的是奈斯会议 (Nicene Council), 尤其是阿他那修士信条 (Athenasian Creed)。这一教义形成基督教的基本信条。
c
4:172.
704
Commentary:
The reference in this verse is to the doctrine of Trinity, that mysterious and abstruse dogma of the three persons of Godhead—Father, Son and Holy Ghost—co-existing and co-equal in all respects, combining to make one God and yet remaining three. It was the Nicene Council and especially the Athenasian Creed that first gave the dogma its definite shape. The doctrine forms the basic Article of the Christian Faith. What a fall for the enlightened West!
d
4:172.
778
The reference in this verse is to the doctrine of Trinity, that mysterious and abstruse dogma of the three persons of Godhead—the Father, the Son and the Holy Ghost—coexisting and co-equal in all respects, combining to make one God and yet remaining three. It was the Nicene Council and especially the Athanasian Creed that first gave the dogma its definite shape. The doctrine forms the basic article of the Christian Faith.
یٰۤاَیُّہَا الَّذِیۡنَ اٰمَنُوۡا لَا تَسۡـَٔلُوۡا عَنۡ اَشۡیَآءَ اِنۡ تُبۡدَ لَکُمۡ تَسُؤۡکُمۡ وَاِنۡ تَسۡـَٔلُوۡا عَنۡہَا حِیۡنَ یُنَزَّلُ الۡقُرۡاٰنُ تُبۡدَ لَکُمۡ عَفَا اللّٰہُ عَنۡہَا ۗ وَاللّٰہُ غَفُوۡرٌ حَلِیۡمٌ
2:109.
The basis of the Islamic Shari‘ah is threefold: (1) The Law as embodied in the Qur’an, (2) the Sunnah or the practice of the Holy Prophet, and (3) injunctions and precepts contained in his authentic sayings. These three sources of Islamic Law deal with all the fundamental problems of man, but minor details are left to his discretion to solve them in the light of the above three torch-bearers of guidance, aided and assisted by his own God- given intellectual powers and faculties. It is to matters relating to minor details that the present verse refers.
2:109.
Commentary:
The verse is important, as it sheds light on the principle underlying the Shari‘ah, i.e. the code of Divine Laws. The bases of the Islamic Shari‘ah are threefold: (1) the Law embodied in the Quran, (2) Sunnah or the practice of the Holy Prophet, and (3) the injunctions and precepts contained in his sayings. These three sources of Islamic Law deal with all the fundamental problems of man, but minor details are left to be thought out by man himself in the light of the above three torch-bearers of guidance, aided and assisted by his own God-given intellectual powers and faculties. It is to matters relating to minor details that the present verse refers and God warns the Faithful that the habit of asking questions about such matters will do them more harm than good.
As a matter of fact, God, in His infinite wisdom, leaves sufficient room for individuals to exercise and develop their power of judgement and their reasoning faculty. When man is confronted with situations and circumstances about which he finds no definite and clear-cut guidance in the Quran, or in the practice or sayings of the Holy Prophet, he has to find a way for himself in order to meet them as best he can, keeping always in view the guiding and unalterable principle that nothing is to be done which runs counter to any Quranic injunction or to the established practice and the authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet. Islam is thus not a hard and fast code of laws, for it does not lay down rigid injunctions regarding minor and ever-changing details. On the contrary, it affords sufficient scope for individ-uals to exercise their judgement in order to adapt an injunction of a general nature to meet a new and changed situation. The basic principles, however, are unchangable. But as details continue to change, Islam has not resorted to rigid legislation with regard to minor details and has forbidden Muslims to ask for legislation regarding them. Indeed, it was about filling up these very details to meet new and altered conditions that the Holy Prophet said اختلاف امتی رحمة i.e. "The difference of opinion among my followers is, indeed, a source of mercy". This hadith meant that as it had been left to Muslims to chalk out a way for themselves with regard to such minor details about which no definite pronouncement is to be found in the Shari‘ah, there was bound to be a difference of opinion among Muslim theologians about them, but that this difference would prove a blessing for them because it would afford opportunities for the exercise and cultivation of their reasoning faculties as well as a suitable and flexible law about ever-changing details.
The reader will see that this verse also incidentally refutes the allegations of those who say that the laws of Islam, being rigid and unchangeable, afford not room for the exercise of individual judgement, and that they fetter humanity for all time to hard and fast rules and are thus calculated to impede the intellectual advancement of man rather than help it.
The expression, which if revealed to you would cause you trouble, means that if God or His Prophet had legislated about minor details and had not left such matters to individual discretion so that people might formulate law concerning them according to their own judgement and their own circumstances, they would have found it troublesome and the development of man’s intellect would have become seriously hampered.
b
2:109.
394
伊斯兰教律令的基础有三个方面: (1) «古兰经» 中所体现的律令, (2) 圣行, 即穆圣的实践以及 (3) 可靠的圣训中所包含的各种命令和教训。伊斯兰教经律的这三个来源涉及人所有基本问题。可是, 次要的细节留待他自己利用安拉赐给他的智慧和才能在以上三种引导的光辉下而自作决定。本节经文所指的, 就是与次要细节有关的那些事情。
d
2:109.
729
Commentary:
The verse is important, as it sheds light on the principle underlying the Shari‘ah, i.e. the code of Divine Laws. The bases of the Islamic Shari‘ah are threefold: (1) the Law embodied in the Quran, (2) Sunnah or the practice of the Holy Prophet, and (3) the injunctions and precepts contained in his sayings. These three sources of Islamic Law deal with all the fundamental problems of man, but minor details are left to be thought out by man himself in the light of the above three torch-bearers of guidance, aided and assisted by his own God-given intellectual powers and faculties. It is to matters relating to minor details that the present verse refers and God warns the Faithful that the habit of asking questions about such matters will do them more harm than good.
As a matter of fact, God, in His infinite wisdom, leaves sufficient room for individuals to exercise and develop their power of judgement and their reasoning faculty. When man is confronted with situations and circumstances about which he finds no definite and clear-cut guidance in the Quran, or in the practice or sayings of the Holy Prophet, he has to find a way for himself in order to meet them as best he can, keeping always in view the guiding and unalterable principle that nothing is to be done which runs counter to any Quranic injunction or to the established practice and the authentic sayings of the Holy Prophet. Islam is thus not a hard and fast code of laws, for it does not lay down rigid injunctions regarding minor and ever-changing details. On the contrary, it affords sufficient scope for individ-uals to exercise their judgement in order to adapt an injunction of a general nature to meet a new and changed situation. The basic principles, however, are unchangable. But as details continue to change, Islam has not resorted to rigid legislation with regard to minor details and has forbidden Muslims to ask for legislation regarding them. Indeed, it was about filling up these very details to meet new and altered conditions that the Holy Prophet said اختلاف امتی رحمة i.e. "The difference of opinion among my followers is, indeed, a source of mercy". This hadith meant that as it had been left to Muslims to chalk out a way for themselves with regard to such minor details about which no definite pronouncement is to be found in the Shari‘ah, there was bound to be a difference of opinion among Muslim theologians about them, but that this difference would prove a blessing for them because it would afford opportunities for the exercise and cultivation of their reasoning faculties as well as a suitable and flexible law about ever-changing details.
The reader will see that this verse also incidentally refutes the allegations of those who say that the laws of Islam, being rigid and unchangeable, afford not room for the exercise of individual judgement, and that they fetter humanity for all time to hard and fast rules and are thus calculated to impede the intellectual advancement of man rather than help it.
The expression, which if revealed to you would cause you trouble, means that if God or His Prophet had legislated about minor details and had not left such matters to individual discretion so that people might formulate law concerning them according to their own judgement and their own circumstances, they would have found it troublesome and the development of man’s intellect would have become seriously hampered.
a
2:109.
796
The basis of the Islamic Shari‘ah is threefold: (1) The Law as embodied in the Qur’an, (2) the Sunnah or the practice of the Holy Prophet, and (3) injunctions and precepts contained in his authentic sayings. These three sources of Islamic Law deal with all the fundamental problems of man, but minor details are left to his discretion to solve them in the light of the above three torch-bearers of guidance, aided and assisted by his own God- given intellectual powers and faculties. It is to matters relating to minor details that the present verse refers.
اِنۡ تُعَذِّبۡہُمۡ فَاِنَّہُمۡ عِبَادُکَ ۖ وَاِنۡ تَغۡفِرۡ لَہُمۡ فَاِنَّکَ اَنۡتَ الۡعَزِیۡزُ الۡحَکِیۡمُ
Commentary:
This verse constitutes a most pathetic appeal by Jesus to God on behalf of his followers; and the succeeding verse provides the divine answer to the appeal.
746
Commentary:
This verse constitutes a most pathetic appeal by Jesus to God on behalf of his followers; and the succeeding verse provides the divine answer to the appeal.
وَاِنۡ یَّمۡسَسۡکَ اللّٰہُ بِضُرٍّ فَلَا کَاشِفَ لَہٗۤ اِلَّا ہُوَ ۖ وَاِنۡ یَّمۡسَسۡکَ بِخَیۡرٍ فَہُوَ عَلٰی کُلِّ شَیۡءٍ قَدِیۡرٌ
10:108.
10:108.
10:108.
Commentary:
It is his own actions that are the cause of all harm that befalls a man. The words, if Allah touch thee with affliction, therefore, do not mean that God is the cause of affliction. They are meant to convey the idea that God being the first cause of all things, everything that happens in the universe is in a way attributable to Him. The expression is also intended to hint that it is God alone Who can remove man’s afflictions.
Happiness indeed comes from God, Who is the real source of all good. This is why, when speaking of happiness coming to man, the Quran uses the expression, He has power to do all that He wills.
e
10:108.
a
10:108.
765
Commentary:
It is his own actions that are the cause of all harm that befalls a man. The words, if Allah touch thee with affliction, therefore, do not mean that God is the cause of affliction. They are meant to convey the idea that God being the first cause of all things, everything that happens in the universe is in a way attributable to Him. The expression is also intended to hint that it is God alone Who can remove man’s afflictions.
Happiness indeed comes from God, Who is the real source of all good. This is why, when speaking of happiness coming to man, the Quran uses the expression, He has power to do all that He wills.
b
10:108.
وَمِنۡہُمۡ مَّنۡ یَّسۡتَمِعُ اِلَیۡکَ ۖ وَجَعَلۡنَا عَلٰی قُلُوۡبِہِمۡ اَکِنَّۃً اَنۡ یَّفۡقَہُوۡہُ وَفِیۡۤ اٰذَانِہِمۡ وَقۡرًا ۚ وَاِنۡ یَّرَوۡا کُلَّ اٰیَۃٍ لَّا یُؤۡمِنُوۡا بِہَا ۚ حَتّٰۤی اِذَا جَآءُوۡکَ یُجٰدِلُوۡنَکَ یَقُوۡلُ الَّذِیۡنَ کَفَرُوۡۤا اِنۡ ہٰذَاۤ اِلَّاۤ اَسٰطِیۡرُ الۡاَوَّلِیۡنَ
قرآن مجید کی دوسری آیات بتاتی ہیں کہ یہ سزا انسانی بداعمالی کے نتیجہ میں ہوتی ہے ورنہ خداتعالیٰ کسی کو ایمان سے محروم نہیں کرتا۔ جیسا کہ فرماتا ہے بَلْ طَبَعَ اللّٰہُ عَلَیْھَا بِکُفْرِھِمْ (النسآء: ۱۵۶) کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے ان کے دلوں پر ان کے کفر کی وجہ سے مہر لگائی ہے۔
یہ کافروں کا قول ہے۔ ورنہ قرآن مجید میں سب پرانے واقعات بطور پیشگوئی کے بیان ہوئے ہیں اور ایسے ہی واقعات رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم یا ان کی امت سے گزرے ہیں۔
10:43; 17:48.
17:47; 41:6.
10:43; 17:48.
17:47; 41:6.
Commentary:
For an explanation of "veils" and "deafness", see 2:8.
What the Quran calls "signs" are described by disbelievers as mere "fables of the ancients," which saying of theirs is condemned by God. This shows that in the sight of God the stories of past Prophets and past nations given in the Quran are not meant as "tales" or "stories" but as "signs", being prophecies of future events which, when fulfilled, will serve as "signs".
b
10:43; 17:48.
c
17:47; 41:6.
1
قرآن مجید کی دوسری آیات بتاتی ہیں کہ یہ سزا انسانی بداعمالی کے نتیجہ میں ہوتی ہے ورنہ خداتعالیٰ کسی کو ایمان سے محروم نہیں کرتا۔ جیسا کہ فرماتا ہے بَلْ طَبَعَ اللّٰہُ عَلَیْھَا بِکُفْرِھِمْ (النسآء: ۱۵۶) کہ اللہ تعالیٰ نے ان کے دلوں پر ان کے کفر کی وجہ سے مہر لگائی ہے۔
2
یہ کافروں کا قول ہے۔ ورنہ قرآن مجید میں سب پرانے واقعات بطور پیشگوئی کے بیان ہوئے ہیں اور ایسے ہی واقعات رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم یا ان کی امت سے گزرے ہیں۔
a
10:43; 17:48.
b
17:47; 41:6.
773
Commentary:
For an explanation of "veils" and "deafness", see 2:8.
What the Quran calls "signs" are described by disbelievers as mere "fables of the ancients," which saying of theirs is condemned by God. This shows that in the sight of God the stories of past Prophets and past nations given in the Quran are not meant as "tales" or "stories" but as "signs", being prophecies of future events which, when fulfilled, will serve as "signs".
b
10:43; 17:48.
c
17:47; 41:6.
وَہُمۡ یَنۡہَوۡنَ عَنۡہُ وَیَنۡـَٔوۡنَ عَنۡہُ ۖ وَاِنۡ یُّہۡلِکُوۡنَ اِلَّاۤ اَنۡفُسَہُمۡ وَمَا یَشۡعُرُوۡنَ
这节经文有说服力地阐明了 «古兰经» 的强烈感召力。
واؤ کے معنے بعض جگہ اردو میں ’’لیکن‘‘ کے ہو سکتے ہیں وہی اس جگہ کئے گئے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس سے مضمون زیادہ واضح ہوتا ہے۔
The verse constitutes an eloquent commentary on the captivating power of the Qur’an.
Commentary:
The order in which the words have been put in this verse is worth noting. Disbelievers’ forbidding others to listen to the Quran or to the words of the Holy Prophet implied that they, too, were keeping away from the Holy Prophet and the Quran. In spite of this, their own keeping away has been expressly and separately mentioned in the verse in order to show that they were afraid of being influenced by the words of the
Quran or the discourses of the Holy Prophet. So great was their fear that they not only forbade others to go near the Holy Prophet but themselves took special care to remain aloof from him, lest his words should captivate their hearts. This shows that they were aware of the great influence which the Quran and the discourses of the Holy Prophet exercised on the minds of hearers. No wonder that the disbelievers looked upon the Quran as a "manifest magic" (34:44).
423
这节经文有说服力地阐明了 «古兰经» 的强烈感召力。
3
واؤ کے معنے بعض جگہ اردو میں ’’لیکن‘‘ کے ہو سکتے ہیں وہی اس جگہ کئے گئے ہیں۔ کیونکہ اس سے مضمون زیادہ واضح ہوتا ہے۔
774
Commentary:
The order in which the words have been put in this verse is worth noting. Disbelievers’ forbidding others to listen to the Quran or to the words of the Holy Prophet implied that they, too, were keeping away from the Holy Prophet and the Quran. In spite of this, their own keeping away has been expressly and separately mentioned in the verse in order to show that they were afraid of being influenced by the words of the
Quran or the discourses of the Holy Prophet. So great was their fear that they not only forbade others to go near the Holy Prophet but themselves took special care to remain aloof from him, lest his words should captivate their hearts. This shows that they were aware of the great influence which the Quran and the discourses of the Holy Prophet exercised on the minds of hearers. No wonder that the disbelievers looked upon the Quran as a "manifest magic" (34:44).
838
The verse constitutes an eloquent commentary on the captivating power of the Qur’an.
وَاِنۡ کَانَ کَبُرَ عَلَیۡکَ اِعۡرَاضُہُمۡ فَاِنِ اسۡتَطَعۡتَ اَنۡ تَبۡتَغِیَ نَفَقًا فِی الۡاَرۡضِ اَوۡ سُلَّمًا فِی السَّمَآءِ فَتَاۡتِیَہُمۡ بِاٰیَۃٍ ۚ وَلَوۡ شَآءَ اللّٰہُ لَجَمَعَہُمۡ عَلَی الۡہُدٰی ۚ فَلَا تَکُوۡنَنَّ مِنَ الۡجٰہِلِیۡنَ
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی مشیّت پر صبر کر۔
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
The words, to seek a passage into the earth, signify 'using worldly means,' i.e. preaching and propagating the truth; and the words, a ladder unto heaven, imply 'using spiritual means,' i.e. offering prayers to God for the guidance of disbelievers, etc. Prayer is indeed the ladder by which a man can spiritually mount to heaven. The Holy Prophet is told to employ both these means. The word Jahil as in 2:274 means "one not knowing" or "unacquainted." The Holy Prophet is exhorted not to remain unacquainted with the law of God in this respect. The verse also sheds light on the Holy Prophet’s great solicitude and concern for the spiritual well-being of his people. He was prepared to go to any length to bring them a Sign, even if he had "to seek a passage in the earth or a ladder unto heaven."
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
Important Words:
نفقا (passage). نفق means, a hole or a passage bored into or through the earth and having an opening at the other end (Aqrab). See also 9:67.
سلما (ladder) is derived from سلم (sallama). They say سلمه i.e. he made him safe and secure. سلمه الیه means, he gave or delivered it to him. سلم (sullam) means, a ladder or series of stairs or steps meant for ascending. It is so called because it delivers one to the place to which one desires to go. The word also signifies a means to a thing (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, to seek a passage into the earth, signify using worldly means, i.e. preaching and propagating the truth in the earth in order to strengthen the faith; and the words, a ladder unto Heaven, imply using spiritual means, i.e. offering up prayers to God for the guidance of disbelievers, etc. Prayer is indeed the ladder by which a man can mount to Heaven.
The Holy Prophet has been told here that God is not going to compel men to embrace Islam; if he desires their wholesale conversion he should assiduously follow the two prescribed courses, one earthly and the other heavenly. He should, on the one hand, devote himself vigorously to preaching and propagating the truth; and, on the other, he should fervently pray to God that He may guide mankind and help the cause of Islam.
It goes without saying that the Holy Prophet acted upon both these methods to the fullest extent, as a result of which God helped the cause of Islam, so much so that within a small space of time the whole of Arabia was converted.
The word جاھل (one lacking knowledge) is here used only in the sense of one not knowing or unacquainted, and not in the stronger sense of ignorant. It has been also used in this sense in other verses of the Quran. For instance, we read in 2:274; "One who does not know them (the needy) thinks them to be free from want", i.e. those who are unacquainted with the real condition of the poor, think them to be well off. In the verse under comment, the Holy Prophet has been exhorted not to remain unacquainted with the law of God in this respect.
It should also be noted that it was not by way of rebuke, as some have thought, that the Holy Prophet was asked to seek a passage into the earth or a ladder into the sky. The words become meaningless, if taken in that light. What is meant is simply the suggestion of two ways of success which, when acted upon, proved wonderfully effective.
c
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
1
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی مشیّت پر صبر کر۔
c
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
783
Important Words:
نفقا (passage). نفق means, a hole or a passage bored into or through the earth and having an opening at the other end (Aqrab). See also 9:67.
سلما (ladder) is derived from سلم (sallama). They say سلمه i.e. he made him safe and secure. سلمه الیه means, he gave or delivered it to him. سلم (sullam) means, a ladder or series of stairs or steps meant for ascending. It is so called because it delivers one to the place to which one desires to go. The word also signifies a means to a thing (Lane).
Commentary:
The words, to seek a passage into the earth, signify using worldly means, i.e. preaching and propagating the truth in the earth in order to strengthen the faith; and the words, a ladder unto Heaven, imply using spiritual means, i.e. offering up prayers to God for the guidance of disbelievers, etc. Prayer is indeed the ladder by which a man can mount to Heaven.
The Holy Prophet has been told here that God is not going to compel men to embrace Islam; if he desires their wholesale conversion he should assiduously follow the two prescribed courses, one earthly and the other heavenly. He should, on the one hand, devote himself vigorously to preaching and propagating the truth; and, on the other, he should fervently pray to God that He may guide mankind and help the cause of Islam.
It goes without saying that the Holy Prophet acted upon both these methods to the fullest extent, as a result of which God helped the cause of Islam, so much so that within a small space of time the whole of Arabia was converted.
The word جاھل (one lacking knowledge) is here used only in the sense of one not knowing or unacquainted, and not in the stronger sense of ignorant. It has been also used in this sense in other verses of the Quran. For instance, we read in 2:274; "One who does not know them (the needy) thinks them to be free from want", i.e. those who are unacquainted with the real condition of the poor, think them to be well off. In the verse under comment, the Holy Prophet has been exhorted not to remain unacquainted with the law of God in this respect.
It should also be noted that it was not by way of rebuke, as some have thought, that the Holy Prophet was asked to seek a passage into the earth or a ladder into the sky. The words become meaningless, if taken in that light. What is meant is simply the suggestion of two ways of success which, when acted upon, proved wonderfully effective.
b
5:49; 6:150; 11:119; 13:32; 16:10.
844
The words, to seek a passage into the earth, signify 'using worldly means,' i.e. preaching and propagating the truth; and the words, a ladder unto heaven, imply 'using spiritual means,' i.e. offering prayers to God for the guidance of disbelievers, etc. Prayer is indeed the ladder by which a man can spiritually mount to heaven. The Holy Prophet is told to employ both these means. The word Jahil as in 2:274 means "one not knowing" or "unacquainted." The Holy Prophet is exhorted not to remain unacquainted with the law of God in this respect. The verse also sheds light on the Holy Prophet’s great solicitude and concern for the spiritual well-being of his people. He was prepared to go to any length to bring them a Sign, even if he had "to seek a passage in the earth or a ladder unto heaven."
وَاِنۡ تُطِعۡ اَکۡثَرَ مَنۡ فِی الۡاَرۡضِ یُضِلُّوۡکَ عَنۡ سَبِیۡلِ اللّٰہِ ۚ اِنۡ یَّتَّبِعُوۡنَ اِلَّا الظَّنَّ وَاِنۡ ہُمۡ اِلَّا یَخۡرُصُوۡنَ
10:37; 53:29.
10:37; 53:29.
10:37; 53:29.
Important Words:
یخرصون (lie) is derived from خرص which means, he computed the quantity or number of a thing by conjecture; he conjectured; he opined while he was not certain. It also means, he spoke falsely, or he lied, or he said what was untrue. خراص means, a liar; or one who only conjectures or opines and does not make sure of a thing by ascertaining the truth (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse purports to say that the question of the truth or otherwise of Islam should not be decided according to the verdict of the majority, for the majority of mankind are ignorant. Therefore, matters of faith cannot be decided by the verdict of the majority. There has never been a people the majority of whom are wise or learned. Even in worldly legislatures, it is only a limited number of persons whose opinion matters. Again, even in so-called advanced countries the masses have their leaders, and it is these leaders whose opinion they follow. Thus, in reality, it is always a limited number whose opinion matters.
The verse refers particularly to the people of Arabia in the time of the Holy Prophet, the majority of whom were undoubtedly ignorant.
d
10:37; 53:29.
a
10:37; 53:29.
858
Important Words:
یخرصون (lie) is derived from خرص which means, he computed the quantity or number of a thing by conjecture; he conjectured; he opined while he was not certain. It also means, he spoke falsely, or he lied, or he said what was untrue. خراص means, a liar; or one who only conjectures or opines and does not make sure of a thing by ascertaining the truth (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The verse purports to say that the question of the truth or otherwise of Islam should not be decided according to the verdict of the majority, for the majority of mankind are ignorant. Therefore, matters of faith cannot be decided by the verdict of the majority. There has never been a people the majority of whom are wise or learned. Even in worldly legislatures, it is only a limited number of persons whose opinion matters. Again, even in so-called advanced countries the masses have their leaders, and it is these leaders whose opinion they follow. Thus, in reality, it is always a limited number whose opinion matters.
The verse refers particularly to the people of Arabia in the time of the Holy Prophet, the majority of whom were undoubtedly ignorant.
d
10:37; 53:29.
وَلَا تَاۡکُلُوۡا مِمَّا لَمۡ یُذۡکَرِ اسۡمُ اللّٰہِ عَلَیۡہِ وَاِنَّہٗ لَفِسۡقٌ ۗ وَاِنَّ الشَّیٰطِیۡنَ لَیُوۡحُوۡنَ اِلٰۤی اَوۡلِیَآئِہِمۡ لِیُجٰدِلُوۡکُمۡ ۖ وَاِنۡ اَطَعۡتُمُوۡہُمۡ اِنَّکُمۡ لَمُشۡرِکُوۡنَ
5:4; 6:146.
The verse explains why it is forbidden to eat such animals as die of themselves or such as are not duly slaughtered with an invocation of the name of God. The pronouncement of the name of God produces sanctifying effect on man’s heart which nullifies the hardening effect which the killing of the animal is likely to produce.
5:4; 6:146.
Commentary:
The verse points out that if believers eat of the flesh of those animals on which the name of God has not been pronounced, it will be an act of disobedience and transgression.
One sin leads to another. If a believer fails to pronounce the name of God on his food, his heart becomes devoid of reverence for Him and this gradually leads to شرك i.e. associating partners with God.
b
5:4; 6:146.
456
这节经文说明禁止吃诸如自行死亡的牲畜, 或未诵安拉之名而宰杀的牲畜的理由。诵呼安拉之名在人类心灵上会产生一种神圣效应, 它可以抵消宰杀牲畜所可能产生的冷酷无情的效应。
a
5:4; 6:146.
863
Commentary:
The verse points out that if believers eat of the flesh of those animals on which the name of God has not been pronounced, it will be an act of disobedience and transgression.
One sin leads to another. If a believer fails to pronounce the name of God on his food, his heart becomes devoid of reverence for Him and this gradually leads to شرك i.e. associating partners with God.
a
5:4; 6:146.
905
The verse explains why it is forbidden to eat such animals as die of themselves or such as are not duly slaughtered with an invocation of the name of God. The pronouncement of the name of God produces sanctifying effect on man’s heart which nullifies the hardening effect which the killing of the animal is likely to produce.
وَقَالُوۡا مَا فِیۡ بُطُوۡنِ ہٰذِہِ الۡاَنۡعٰمِ خَالِصَۃٌ لِّذُکُوۡرِنَا وَمُحَرَّمٌ عَلٰۤی اَزۡوٰجِنَا ۖ وَاِنۡ یَّکُنۡ مَّیۡتَۃً فَہُمۡ فِیۡہِ شُرَکَآءُ ۚ سَیَجۡزِیۡہِمۡ وَصۡفَہُمۡ ۚ اِنَّہٗ حَکِیۡمٌ عَلِیۡمٌ
Another absurd custom of the Arabs.
Commentary:
The verse refers to another absurd custom of the Arabs. The Divine attributes "Wise" and "All-Knowing" have been mentioned here to point out that the people got entangled in these foolish beliefs and practices because they turned away from the Wise and Knowing God and followed false deities and their foolish devotees.
879
Commentary:
The verse refers to another absurd custom of the Arabs. The Divine attributes "Wise" and "All-Knowing" have been mentioned here to point out that the people got entangled in these foolish beliefs and practices because they turned away from the Wise and Knowing God and followed false deities and their foolish devotees.
920
Another absurd custom of the Arabs.